Hrmiasterlin derivatives and uses thereof

ABSTRACT

The present invention provides compounds having formula (I):  
                 
         and additionally provides methods for the synthesis thereof and methods for the use thereof in the treatment of cancer, wherein R 1 -R 7 , X 1 , X 2 , R, Q, and n are as defined herein.

PRIORITY CLAIM

The present application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/366,592, filed Mar. 22, 2002, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Hemiasterlin (1) was first isolated from the sponge Hemiasterella minor (class, Demospongiae; order, Hadromedidia; family, Hemiasterllidae) collected in Sodwana Bay, South Africa (see Kaslunan et al. U.S. Pat. No. 5,661,175). It was reported that Hemiasterlin exhibited antitumor activity against several cell lines, including human lung carcinoma, human colon carcinoma and human melanoma.

After the initial isolation and reporting of this compound, additional hemiasterlins were isolated, and several hemiasterlin derivatives were synthesized and their biological activity was also investigated. It was subsequently reported that Hemiasterlin and certain analogs thereof exhibit antimitotic activity and thus are useful for the treatment of certain cancers (see, U.S. Pat. No. 6,153,590 and PCT application WO 99/32509). However, only a rather limited number of Hemiasterlin analogs were prepared, half of which were the natural products themselves, isolated from Cymbastela sp., or were obtained by modifications to the natural products. Thus the number and types of derivatives that could be prepared and evaluated for biological activity were limited.

Clearly, there remains a need to develop synthetic methodologies to access and examine the therapeutic effect of a variety of novel derivatives of Hemiasterlin, particularly those that are inaccessible by making modifications to the natural product. It would also be of particular interest to develop novel compounds that exhibit a favorable therapeutic profile in vivo (e.g., are safe and effective, while retaining stability in biological media).

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

As discussed above, there remains a need to develop novel Hemiasterlin analogs to evaluate their potential as therapeutic agents for the treatment of cancer. The present invention provides novel compounds of general formula (I),

-   -   and additionally provides methods for the synthesis thereof and         methods for the use thereof in the treatment of cancer, wherein         R₁-R₇, X₁, X₂, R, Q, and n are as defined herein. The inventive         compounds also find use in the prevention of restenosis of blood         vessels subject to traumas such as angioplasty and stenting.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF CERTAIN PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS OF THE INVENTION

In recognition of the need to access and further explore the biological activity of novel derivatives of Hemiasterlin, and this class of peptides in general, the present invention provides novel peptide compounds, as described in more detail herein, which demonstrate antitumor activity. Thus, the compounds of the invention, and pharmaceutical compositions thereof, are useful for the treatment of cancer. In certain embodiments, the compounds of the present invention can be used for the treatment of diseases and disorders including, but not limited to prostate, breast, colon, bladder, cervical, skin, testicular, kidney, ovarian, stomach, brain, liver, pancreatic or esophageal cancer, lymphoma, leukemia and multiple myeloma. In certain other embodiments, the inventive compounds also find use in the prevention of restenosis of blood vessels subject to traumas such as angioplasty and stenting.

1) General Description of Compounds of the Invention

The compounds of the invention include compounds of the general formula (I) as further defined below:

-   -   wherein n is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4;     -   X₁ and X₂ are each independently CR_(A)R_(B), C(═O), or —SO₂—;         wherein each occurrence of R_(A) and R_(B) is independently         hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(C) or an         aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or         heteroaryl moiety; wherein each occurrence of R_(C) is         independently hydrogen, OH, OR_(D), or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;         wherein RD is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   each occurrence of R₃ and R₄ is independently hydrogen, or an         aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or         heteroaryl moiety; or wherein any two R₁, R₂, R₃ and R₄ groups,         taken together, may form an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic,         alicyclicc(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl)         or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl         moiety;     -   R₅, R₆ and R₇ are each independently hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(E) or an         aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or         heteroaryl moiety, wherein each occurrence of R_(E) is         independently hydrogen, OH, OR_(F), or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or         wherein any two R₅, R₆ and R₇ groups, taken together, form an         alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, alicyclic(aryl),         heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl) or         heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl         moiety; wherein R_(F) is an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or         R₇ may be absent when NR₇ is linked to R via a double bond;     -   R is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic,         aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and     -   Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q′), NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), N₃, ═N—OH, or an         aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or         heteroaryl moiety; wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are each         independently hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or         R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to         which they are attached, may form an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic,         alicyclic(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl) or         heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl         moiety; and     -   pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof.

In certain embodiments, compounds of formula (I) and compounds described in classes and subclasses herein, are not naturally occurring Hemiasterlins.

In certain embodiments, compounds of formula (I) and compounds described in classes and subclasses herein, do not have the following structure:

-   -   In certain embodiments of compounds described directly above and         compounds as described in certain classes and subclasses herein,         the compounds do not comprise more than four consecutive α-amino         acid residues, and/or one or more of the following groups do not         occur simultaneously as defined:     -   (a) n is 1;         -   X₁ and X₂ are each C(═O);         -   R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, aliphatic,             alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, Ar-aliphatic-,             Ar-alicyclic-; and, where at least one of R₁ and R₂ is             aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic,             Ar-aliphatic-, Ar-alicyclic- and neither are Ar,             Ar-aliphatic- or Ar-alicyclic-, R₁ and R₂, taken together,             may form a three- to seven-membered ring; wherein Ar is             defined as substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, naphtyl,             anthracyl, phenanthryl, furyl, pyrrolyl, thiophenyl,             benzofuryl, benzothiophenyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl,             imidazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl or pyridyl;         -   R₃ is hydrogen;         -   R₄ is —CR_(4a)R_(4b)R_(4c), wherein R_(4a) and R_(4b) are             each independently hydrogen, aliphatic, alicyclic,             heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, Ar-aliphatic-,             Ar-alicyclic-; and, where at least one of R_(4a) and R_(4b)             is aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic,             Ar-aliphatic-, Ar-alicyclic- and neither are Ar,             Ar-aliphatic- or Ar-alicyclic-, R_(4a) and R_(4b), taken             together, may form a three- to seven-membered ring; and             R_(4c), is hydrogen, aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,             heteroalicyclic, Ar-aliphatic-, Ar-alicyclic- and Ar;             wherein Ar is as defined directly above;         -   R₅, R₆ and R₇ are each independently hydrogen, aliphatic,             alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, Ar-aliphatic-,             Ar-alicyclic- and Ar;         -   R is a moiety selected from the group consisting of: a             linear, saturated or unsaturated, substituted or             unsubstituted alkyl group containing one to six carbon             atoms; and         -   Q is —OR_(G), —SR_(G), —NR_(G)R_(H), —NHCH(R_(K))CO₂H, or             —NRCH(R_(K))CO₂H, wherein R_(G) and R_(H) are each             independently hydrogen, aliphatic, alicyclic,             heteroaliphatic or heteroalicyclic; R_(K) is aliphatic,             alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, or a moiety             having the structure —(CH₂)_(t)NR_(K1)R_(K2), wherein t=1-4             and R_(K1) and R_(K2) are independently hydrogen, aliphatic,             alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic or —C(NH)(NH₂);     -   (b) n is 1;         -   X₁ and X₂ are each C(═O);         -   R₁ is an optionally substituted methylene or —CH═ group             bonded to the indole moiety thereby forming a tricyclic             moiety;         -   R₂ is hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl or acyl             group, or is absent when R₁ is —CH═ as defined above;         -   R₃ is hydrogen or is absent when CR₃ and CR_(y)R_(z), as             defined herein, are linked by a double bond;         -   R₄ is a moiety having the structure:         -    wherein R_(w), R_(y) and R_(z) are each independently             hydrogen, or optionally substituted alkyl or acyl, or R_(z)             is absent when CR₃ and CR_(y)R_(z), as defined herein, are             linked by a double bond; R_(x) is hydrogen or an optional             substituent, or is absent when R₁ is an optionally             substituted methylene or —CH═ group as defined above; Y is             an optional substituent; and m is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4;         -   R₅ is hydrogen, OH or an optionally substituted alkyl or             acyl group;         -   R₆ is hydrogen or an optionally substituted alkyl group;         -   R₇ is hydrogen or alkyl; and         -   —R—X₂-Q together represent an optionally substituted alkyl             moiety;     -   (c) n is 1;         -   X₁ and X₂ are each C(═O);         -   R₁ is hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl or acyl             group, or an optionally substituted methylene or —CH═ group             bonded to the indole moiety thereby forming a tricyclic             moiety;         -   R₂ is hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl or acyl             group, or is absent when R₁ is —CH═ as defined above;         -   R₃ is hydrogen or is absent when CR₃ and CR_(y)R_(z), as             defined herein, are linked by a double bond;         -   R₄ is a moiety having the structure:         -   wherein R_(w), R_(y) and             R_(z) are each independently hydrogen, or optionally             substituted alkyl or acyl, or R_(z) is absent when CR₃ and             CR_(y)R_(z), as defined herein, are linked by a double bond;             with the limitation that R_(y) and R_(z) are not             simultaneously hydrogen; R_(x) is hydrogen or an optional             substituent, or is absent when R₁ is an optionally             substituted methylene or —CH═ group as defined above; Y is             an optional substituent; and m is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4;         -    R₅ is hydrogen, OH or an optionally substituted alkyl or             acyl group;         -   R₆ is hydrogen or an optionally substituted alkyl group;         -   R₇ is hydrogen or alkyl; and         -   —R—X₂-Q together represent an optionally substituted alkyl             moiety or -Q′-C(O)X, wherein Q′ is an optionally substituted             —CH₂—, —CH₂CH₂—, —CH₂CH₂CH₂—, —CH₂CH═CH—, —CH₂C—C— or             phenylene moiety, wherein X is —OR′, —SR′ or —NR′R″ and each             occurrence of R′ and R″ is independently hydrogen or             optionally substituted alkyl;     -   (d) n is 1;         -   X₁ is C═O;         -   R₁ is methyl;         -   R₂ and R₃, taken together, form a piperidine moiety;         -   R₄ and R₅ are each hydrogen,         -   R₆ is —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃;         -   R₇ is —CH₂C(═O)CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —CH₂C(═O)CH₂CH₂CH₃ or             —CH₂C(═O)CH₂CH₃; and         -   —R—X₂-Q together represent the moiety having the structure:     -   (e) n is 1;         -   X₁ is C═O;         -   R₁, R₂, and R₇ are each methyl;         -   R₃ and R₅ are each hydrogen;         -   R₄ and R₆ are each i-propyl; and         -   —R—X₂-Q together represent the moiety having the structure:     -   wherein R_(x) is hydrogen or 2-thiazolyl; and/or     -   (f) n is 1;         -   X₁ is C═O;         -   R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen or C₁₋₄alkyl;         -   R₃ and R₅ are each hydrogen;         -   R₄ and R₆ are each i-propyl;         -   R₇ is methyl; and         -   —R—X₂-Q together represent a moiety having the structure:         -    wherein v is 0, 1 or 2;         -   R′ is hydrogen or C₁₋₄alkyl;         -   R″ is C₁₋₆alkylamino; hydroxy; C₃₋₇cycloalkylamino             optionally substituted by phenyl or benzyl; arylamino;             C₁₋₄alkoxy; benzhydrazino; heterocyclyl optionally             substituted with one to three substituents selected from the             group consisting of benzyl, benzhydryl, alkyl, hydroxy,             alkoxy, alkylcarbamoyloxy, amino, mono- or di-alkylamino,             acylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, phenyl or halogen;             heterocyclylamino; heterocycloalkylamino with the             heterocyclyc group optionally substituted with one to three             substituents selected from the group consisting of benzyl,             benzhydryl, alkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylcarbamoyloxy,             amino, di-alkylamino, acylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino or             halogen; aralkyloxy or aralkyl both optionally substituted             with one to three substituents selected from the group             consisting of halogen, alkoxyxarbonyl, sulfamoyl,             alkylcarbonyloxy, cyano, mono- or di-alkylamino, alkyl,             alkoxy, phenyl, phenoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy,             alkylthio, hydroxy, alkoxycarbonylamino, heterocyclyl,             1,3-dioxolyl, 1,4-dioxolyl, amino, aminosulfonyl or benzyl;             or aralkylamino having C₁₋₄alkylene and the aryl group             optionally substituted with one to three substituents             selected from the group consisting of halogen,             alkoxyxarbonyl, sulfamoyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, carbamoyloxy,             cyano, mono- or di-alkylamino, alkyl, alkoxy, phenyl,             phenoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkylthio,             hydroxy, alkoxycarbonylamino, heterocyclyl, 1,3-dioxolyl,             1,4-dioxolyl, amino or benzyl; and         -   R′″ is hydrogen, alkyl optionally substituted with one to             three substituents selected from the group consisting of             hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, mono- or di-alkylamino, carboxy,             alkoxycarbonyl, carbamoyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, carbamoyloxy or             halogen; alkenyl; alkynyl; C₃₋₇cycloalkyl; aryl optionally             substituted with one to three substituents selected from the             group consisting of halogen, alkoxyxarbonyl, sulfamoyl,             alkylcarbonyloxy, cyano, mono- or di-alkylamino, alkyl,             alkoxy, phenyl, phenoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy,             alkylthio, hydroxy, alkoxycarbonylamino, heterocyclyl,             1,3-dioxolyl, 1,4-dioxolyl, amino or benzyl; aralkyl with             the aryl group optionally substituted with one to three             substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen,             alkoxyxarbonyl, carbamoyl, sulfamoyl, alkylcarbonyloxy,             cyano, mono- or di-alkylamino, alkyl, alkoxy, phenyl,             phenoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkylthio,             hydroxy, alkoxycarbonylamino, heterocyclyl, 1,3-dioxolyl,             1,4-dioxolyl, amino or benzyl; or heterocyclylalkyl;         -   wherein the groups recited in paragraph (f) above are             defined as follows:         -   alkyl refers to a straight-chain or branched-chain             hydrocarbon group optionally substituted with hydroxy,             alkoxy, amino, mono- or di-alkylamino, acetoxy,             alkylcarbonyloxy, alkoxycarbonyl, carbamoyloxy, carbamoyl or             halogen;         -   alkenyl refers to a hydrocarbon chain as defined for alkyl             above having at least one double bond;         -   alkynyl refers to a hydrocarbon chain as defined for alkyl             above having at least one triple bond;         -   C₃₋₇cycloalkyl refers to a saturated, cyclic hydrocarbon             group with 3-7 carbon atoms optionally substituted with             alkyl, phenyl, amino, hydroxy or halogen;         -   C₁₋₄alkylene refers to a biradical linear or branched             hydrocarbon chain containing 1-4 carbon atoms;         -   Aralkyl, refers to an aryl group attached to an alkylene             group;         -   Heterocyclyl refers to saturated, unsaturated or aromatic             monovalent cyclic radical having one to three heteroatoms             selected from O, N and S, or combination thereof, optionally             substituted with one or more occurrences of benzyl,             benzhydryl, alkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylcarbamoyloxy,             amino, mono- or di-alkylamino, acylamino, alkoxycarbonyl             amino or halogen;         -   Amino refers to —NH₂ and includes amino groups which are             further substituted by lower alkyl groups, or nitrogen             protecting groups know in the art;         -   Cycloalkylamino refers to cycloalkyl groups as defined above             attached to a structure via an amino radical;         -   Arylamino is defined as aryl-NH—;         -   Aralkylamino is defined as aralkyl-NH—;         -   Carbamoyl refers to the group —C(═O)—NH₂;         -   Carbamoyloxy refers to the group —O—C(═O)—NH—;         -   Alkylcarbamoyloxy refers to the group —O—C(═O)—NH-alkyl;         -   Alkylcarbonyloxy refers to the group —O—C(═O)-alkyl;         -   Aralkyloxy refers to the group —O-aralkyl; and         -   Alkylthio refers to the group Alkyl-S—.

In certain other embodiments of compounds described in (a) above and compounds as described in certain classes and subclasses herein, the following groups do not occur simultaneously as defined:

-   -   n is 1; X₁ and X₂ are each C(═O); R₁ and R₂ are each         independently hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, n-butyl, acetyl;         or R₁ and R₂, taken together, form a moiety selected from the         group consisting of cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, and         cyclohexyl; R₃ is hydrogen; R₄ is —CR_(4a)R_(4b)R_(4c) wherein         R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each independently methyl, ethyl, n-propyl         or n-butyl; or β_(4a) and R_(4b), taken together, form a moiety         selected from the group consisting of β-cyclopropyl,         β-cyclobutyl, β-cyclopentyl, and β-cyclcohexyl; and R_(4c) is         phenyl, naphtyl, anthracyl or pyrrolyl; R₅ and R₇ are each         independently hydrogen or methyl; R₆ is a three to six carbon,         branched alkyl group; and —R—X₂-Q together represent the moiety         having the structure:         -    wherein R′ is methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl,             tert-butyl, iso-butyl, or sec-butyl; R″ is hydrogen, methyl,             ethyl, propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl or sec-butyl;             and Q is OH or OR_(G) wherein R_(G) is a linear or branched             one to six carbon alkyl group.

In certain other embodiments of compounds described in (a) above and compounds as described in certain classes and subclasses herein, the following groups do not occur simultaneously as defined:

-   -   n is 1; X₁ and X₂ are each C(═O); R₁, R₃ and R₅ are each         hydrogen; R₂ is methyl; R₄ is —CR_(4a)R_(4b)R_(4c), R is         tert-butyl; and —R—X₂-Q together represent the moiety having the         structure:     -   wherein R′ is isopropyl; R″ is methyl; and Q is OH; and         -   (a) R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each methyl; R_(4c) is methyl or             phenyl; and R₇ is hydrogen or methyl;         -   (b) R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each methyl; R_(4c) is hydrogen;             and R₇ is methyl; or         -   (c) R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each hydrogen; R_(4c) is phenyl;             and R₇ is methyl.

In certain other embodiments, compounds of formula (I) and compounds described in classes and subclasses herein, do not have the structure of any one or more of the compounds disclosed on page 8 line 28 through page 25 line 9, page 28 line 1 through page 32 line 9 and page 39 line 16 through page 80 line 20 of WO 03/008378, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

In certain other embodiments, compounds of formula (I) and compounds described in classes and subclasses herein, do not have the structure of any one or more of the compounds disclosed on page 10 line 24 through page 17 line 18, page 17 line 26 through page 19 line 3, page 19 line 10 through page 20 line 3, page 20 line 17 through page 21 line 9, page 21 lines 14-29, page 22 lines 1-12, page 22 lines 16-18, page 22 lines 22-27, page 23 line 1 through page 24 line 21, page 24 line 26 through page 25 line 9, and page 28 line 1 through page 32 line 9 of WO 03/008378.

In certain other embodiments, compounds of formula (a) and compounds described in classes and subclasses herein, do not have the structure of any one or more of the compounds disclosed in Nieman J. et al., “Synthesis and Antitumotic/Cytotoxic Activity of Hemiasterlin Analogues”, Journal of Natural Products, 2003, 66(2):183-199, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

In certain embodiments, compounds of formula (I) and compounds described in classes and subclasses herein, do not have any one or more of the following structure:

In certain other embodiments, compounds of formula (I) are defined as follows:

-   -   X₁ and X₂ are each independently CHR_(A)R_(B), SO₂ or C═O;         wherein R_(A) and R_(B) are each independently hydrogen or         substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or         acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl;     -   R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, or a linear or         branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower         alkyl, lower heteroalkyl or acyl moiety, or an aryl or         heteroaryl moiety; wherein the alkyl, heteroalkyl, and aryl         moieties may be substituted or unsubstituted; or     -   R₁ and R₂, taken together, may form a saturated or unsaturated,         substituted or unsubstituted cyclic ring of 5 to 8 atoms;     -   each occurrence of R₃ and R₄ is independently hydrogen, or a         linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or         unsaturated lower alkyl, lower heteroalkyl, lower-alkyl(aryl),         lower-heteroalkyl(aryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety;         wherein the alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl), heteroalkyl(aryl),         aryl and heteroaryl moieties may be substituted or         unsubstituted; or     -   R₃ and R₄, taken together, may form a saturated or unsaturated,         substituted or unsubstituted cyclic ring of 3 to 8 atoms;     -   the carbon atom bearing R₃ and R₄ may be of S configuration;     -   n is 1;     -   R₅ is hydrogen or a protecting group; wherein the protecting         group may be a nitrogen protecting group;     -   R₆ is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted, linear or         branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower         alkyl or heteroalkyl; or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or         heteroaryl moiety;     -   the carbon atom bearing R₆ may be of S configuration;     -   R₇ is hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted, linear or         branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower         alkyl or heteroalkyl; or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or         heteroaryl moiety; or R₇ may be absent when NR₇ is linked to R         via a double bond;     -   R is a substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic         or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated alkyl moiety; or a         heteroaliphatic moiety containing 1-10 carbon atoms, 1 to 4         nitrogen atoms, 0 to 4 oxygen atoms and 0 to 4 sulfur atoms;         whereby the heteroaliphatic moiety may be substituted or         unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or         saturated or unsaturated;     -   wherein (i) the alkyl moiety may have the structure:     -   wherein R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) are each independently         absent, hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted, linear or         branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower         alkyl or heteroalkyl; or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or         heteroaryl moiety; wherein any two R₇, R_(8a), R_(9a) and         R_(10a) groups may form a substituted or unsubstituted,         saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl, heteroalkyl, alky(aryl)         or heteroalkyl(aryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety;         and wherein the carbon atom bearing R_(8a) may be of S         configuration;     -   (ii) the heteroalkyl moiety may have the structure:         -    wherein R_(8b), R_(9b), R_(10b) and R_(11b) are each             independently absent, hydrogen, or substituted or             unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or             saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl, heteroalkyl or acyl;             or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl moiety;             wherein any two R₇, R_(8b), R_(9b), R_(10b) and R_(11b)             groups may form a substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or             unsaturated cyclic alkyl, heteroalkyl, alky(aryl) or             heteroalkyl(aryl) moiety, or a substituted or unsubstituted             aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein NR₇ and CR_(8b), CR_(8b)             and CR_(9b), CR_(9b) and NR_(10b), and NR_(10b) and CR_(11b)             are each independently linked by a single or double bond as             valency permits; and wherein the carbon atom bearing R_(8b)             may be of S configuration;     -   (iii) or the heteroalkyl moiety may have the structure:     -    wherein R_(8c), R_(9c), R_(10c), R_(11c) and R_(12c) are each         independently absent, hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted,         linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or         unsaturated lower alkyl or heteroalkyl; or a substituted or         unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein any two R₇,         R_(8c), R_(9c), R_(10c), R_(11c) and R_(12c) groups may form a         substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated cyclic         alkyl, heteroalkyl, ally(aryl) or heteroalkyl(aryl) moiety, or a         substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein         NR₇ and CR_(8c), CR_(8c) and CR_(9c), CR_(9c) and CR_(10c),         CR_(10c) and CR_(11c) are each independently linked by a single         or double bond as valency permits; and wherein the carbon atom         bearing R_(8c) may be of S configuration; and     -   Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q′), NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″)         are each independently hydrogen or a substituted or         unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or         saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl or heteroalkyl moiety, or a         substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or         wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken together, may form a         substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated cyclic         alkyl or heteroalkyl moiety or a substituted or unsubstituted         aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and     -   pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof.

In certain embodiments, the present invention defines certain classes of compounds which are of special interest. For example, one class of compounds of special interest includes those compounds having the structure of formula (I) in which R is —CH(R_(8a))C(R_(8a))═C(R_(10a))— and the compound has the structure (Ia):

-   -   wherein R₁-R₇, X₁, X₂, Q and n are defined in classes and         subclasses herein;     -   R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) are each independently hydrogen, or         an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl         or heteroaryl moiety; and wherein any two R₇, R_(8a), R_(9a) and         R_(10a) groups may form a substituted or unsubstituted,         saturated or unsaturated alicyclic, heteroalicyclic,         alicyclic(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl) or         heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl         moiety.

Another class of compounds of special interest, herein referred to as class (Ib), consists of compounds having the structure of formula (I) in which X₂ is C═O and R is a heteroaliphatic moiety containing 1-10 carbon atoms, 1 to 4 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 4 oxygen atoms and 0 to 4 sulfur atoms, whereby the heteroaliphatic moiety may be substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated.

Another class of compounds of special interest consists of compounds having the structure of formula (I) in which X₁ is C═O; n is 1; R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a cyclic heterocyclic or heteroaryl moiety; R₃ is hydrogen or is absent when the carbon atom bearing R₃ is linked to N or E via a double bond; and the compound has the structure (Ic):

-   -   wherein R₂, R₅-R₇, R, X₂ and Q are defined in classes and         subclasses herein;     -   each occurrence of G, J, L and M is independently CHR^(iv),         CR^(iv)R^(v), O, S, NR^(iv)R^(v), wherein each occurrence of         R^(iv) and R^(v) is independently absent, hydrogen,         —C(═O)R^(vi), or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or wherein any two         adjacent R₂, R^(iv), R^(v) or R^(vi) groups, taken together,         form a substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated         alicyclic or heteroalicyclic moiety containing 3-6 atoms or an         aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein each occurrence of R^(vi) is         an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl         or heteroaryl moiety;     -   N and G, G and J, J and L, L and M, M and CR₃, and CR₃ and N are         each independently linked by a single or double bond as valency         permits; and     -   g, j, 1 and m are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6,         wherein the sum of g, j, l and m is 3-6.

Another class of compounds of special interest consists of compounds having the structure of formula (I) in which X₁ is C═O; n is 1; R₃ and R₄ are each independently an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or, when taken together, form an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, alicyclic(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl) or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety; and the compound has the structure (Id):

-   -   wherein R₁, R₂, R₅-R₇, R. X₂ and Q are defined in classes and         subclasses herein.

The following structures illustrate several exemplary types of compounds of class (Ia). Additional compounds are described in the Exemplification herein.

The following structures illustrate several exemplary types of compounds of class (Ib). Additional compounds are described in the Exemplification herein.

The following structures illustrate several exemplary types of compounds of class (Ic). Additional compounds are described in the Exemplification herein.

The following structures illustrate several exemplary types of compounds of class (Id). Additional compounds are described in the Exemplification herein.

Other compounds of the invention will be readily apparent to the reader.

A number of important subclasses of each of the foregoing classes deserve separate mention; for example, one important subclass of class (Ia) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ia) in which X₂ is C═O; and the compound has the following structure:

wherein R₁-R₇, n and Q are defined in classes and subclasses herein;

-   -   R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) are each independently hydrogen, or         an alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and wherein         any two R₇, R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) groups may form a cyclic         alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl), -heteroalykl(aryl),         -alkyl(heteroaryl) or -heteroalkyl(heteroaryl) moiety, or an         aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and     -   X₁ is CR_(A)R_(B), SO₂ or C═O; wherein R_(A) and R_(B) are each         independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl.

Another important subclass of class (Ia) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ia) in which X₁ is C═O; and the compound has the following structure:

-   -   wherein R₁-R₇, n and Q are defined in classes and subclasses         herein;     -   R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) are each independently hydrogen, or         an alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and wherein         any two R₇, R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) groups may form a cyclic         alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl), -heteroalykl(aryl),         -alkyl(heteroaryl) or -heteroalkyl(heteroaryl) moiety, or an         aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and     -   X₂ is CR_(A)R_(B), SO₂ or C═O; wherein R_(A) and R_(B) are each         independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl.

Another important subclass of class (Ia) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ia) in which X₁ and X₂ are each C═O; n is 1; R₃ is hydrogen; R₄ is a moiety having the structure —CR_(4a)R_(4b)R_(4c); and the compound has the following structure:

-   -   wherein R₁-R₂, R₅-R₇ and Q are defined in classes and subclasses         herein; and     -   R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each independently hydrogen or lower alkyl         or heteroalkyl, and R_(4c) is aryl or heteroaryl; and     -   R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) are each independently hydrogen, or         an alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and wherein         any two R₇, R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) groups may form a cyclic         alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl), -heteroalykl(aryl),         -alkyl(heteroaryl) or -heteroalkyl(heteroaryl) moiety, or an         aryl or heteroaryl moiety.

Another important subclass of class (Ia) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ia) in which X₁ and X₂ are each C═O; Q is an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing cyclic moiety; and the compound has the following structure:

-   -   wherein R₁-R₇ and n are defined in classes and subclasses         herein;     -   R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) are each independently hydrogen, or         an alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and wherein         any two R₇, R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) groups may form a cyclic         alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl), -heteroalykl(aryl),         -alkyl(heteroaryl) or -heteroalkyl(heteroaryl) moiety, or an         aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   each occurrence of A, B, D or E is independently CHR^(i),         CR^(i)R^(ii), O, S, N wherein each occurrence of R^(i) and         R^(ii) is independently absent, hydrogen, —C(═O)R^(iii), or an         aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or         heteroaryl moiety; or wherein any two adjacent R^(i), R^(ii) or         R^(iii) groups, taken together, form a alicyclic or         heteroalicyclic moiety containing 3-6 atoms or an aryl or         heteroaryl moiety; wherein each occurrence of R^(iii) is an         aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or         heteroaryl moiety;     -   N and A, A and B, B and D, D and E, and E and N are each         independently linked by a single or double bond as valency         permits; and     -   a, b, d and e are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7,         wherein the sum of a, b, d and e is 4-7.

Another important subclass of class (Ia) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ia) in which X₁ and X₂ are each C═O; Q is an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing cyclic moiety; n is 1; R₃ is hydrogen; R₄ is a moiety having the structure —CR_(4a)R_(4b)R_(4c); and the compound has the following structure:

-   -   wherein R₁, R₂, R₅-R₇, A, B, D, E, a, b, d and e are defined in         classes and subclasses herein;     -   R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each independently hydrogen or lower alkyl         or heteroalkyl, and R_(4c) is a substituted or unsubstituted         aryl or heteroaryl group;     -   R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) are each independently hydrogen, or         an alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and wherein         any two R₇, R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) groups may form a cyclic         alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl), -heteroalykl(aryl),         -alkyl(heteroaryl) or -heteroalkyl(heteroaryl) moiety, or an         aryl or heteroaryl moiety.

A number of important subclasses of each of the foregoing subclasses of class (Ia) deserve separate mention; these subclasses include subclasses of the foregoing subclasses of class (Ia) in which:

-   -   i-a. R₁ and R₂ are independently hydrogen or substituted or         unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, saturated         or unsaturated lower alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl) or acyl;     -   ii-a. R₁ is hydrogen and R₂ is substituted or unsubstituted,         linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, saturated or unsaturated         lower alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl) or acyl;     -   iii-a. R₁ is hydrogen and R₂ is substituted or unsubstituted,         linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, saturated or unsaturated         lower alkyl;     -   iv-a. R₁ is hydrogen and R₂ is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl,         pentyl, tert-butyl, i-propyl, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₂CH₃,         —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)CH(CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)₂CH₂CH₃,         —CH(CH₃)cyclobutyl, —CH(Et)₂, —CH(CH₃)₂C CH, cyclohexyl,         cyclopentyl, cyclobutyl or cyclopropyl;     -   v-a. R₁ and R₂ are each hydrogen;     -   vi-a. The carbon atom bearing R₃ and R₄ is of S configuration;     -   vii-a. R₃ is hydrogen and R₄ is substituted or unsubstituted,         linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or         unsaturated lower alkyl, heteroalkyl or -alkyl(aryl) or         substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl;     -   viii-a R₃ is hydrogen and R₄ is —CR_(4a)R_(4b)R_(4c); wherein         R_(4a) and R_(4b) are independently hydrogen, or a substituted         or unsusbtituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic,         saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl moiety and R_(4c) is         substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl;     -   ix-a. R₃ is hydrogen and R₄ is —CR_(4a)R_(4b)Ph; wherein R_(4a)         and R_(4b) are independently hydrogen, or a substituted or         unsusbtituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, saturated         or unsaturated lower alkyl moiety;     -   x-a. R₄ is a substituted or unsubstituted 3-indole moiety;     -   xi-a. R₃ is hydrogen;     -   xii-a. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted pyrrolidine group;     -   xiii-a. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted piperidine group;     -   xiv-a. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted thiazolidine group;     -   xv-a. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted morpholine group;     -   xvi-a. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted thiomorpholine group;     -   xvii-a. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted indole group;     -   xviii-a. R₃ and R₄ are each independently substituted or         unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or         saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl, heteroalkyl or         -allyl(aryl) or substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl;     -   xix-a. R₃ and R₄ are each independently substituted or         unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic or         saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl, -alkyl(aryl) or         substituted or unsubstituted aryl;     -   xx-a. R₃ and R₄ are each independently substituted or         unsubstituted lower alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl;     -   xxi-a. R₃ and R₄ are each independently methyl, ethyl, propyl,         butyl, pentyl, tert-butyl, i-propyl, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃,         —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₂CH₃, —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)CH(CH₃)₂,         —CH(CH₃)₂CH₂CH₃, —CH(CH₃)cyclobutyl, —CH(Et)₂, cyclohexyl,         cyclopentyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopropyl, phenyl, —C₁₋₆alkylOR^(a),         —C₁₋₆alkylSR^(a) or —CR^(a)R^(b)R^(c); wherein R^(a) and R^(b)         are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted, linear         or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated         lower alkyl and R^(c) is substituted or unsubstituted aryl or         heteroaryl;     -   xxii-a. R₃ and R₄ are each independently methyl, ethyl, propyl,         butyl, pentyl, tert-butyl, i-propyl, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃,         —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₂CH₃, —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)CH(CH₃)₂,         —CH(CH₃)₂CH₂CH₃, —CH(CH₃)cyclobutyl, —CH(Et)₂, cyclohexyl,         cyclopentyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopropyl, phenyl, —C₁₋₆alkylOR^(a),         —C₁₋₆alkylSR^(a) or —CR^(b)R^(c)Ph;     -   wherein R^(a) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted, linear         or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated         lower alkyl and R^(b) And R^(c) are each independently         substituted or unsubstituted linear or branched, cyclic or         acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl;     -   xxiii-a. R₃ and R₄ are each ethyl;     -   xxiv-a. R₃ is phenyl and R₄ is lower alkyl;     -   xxv-a. R₃ is phenyl and R₄ is ethyl;     -   xxvi-a. R₃ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted cycloalkyl group;     -   xxvii-a. R₃ and R₄, taken together, form a cyclohexyl group;     -   xxviii-a. R₃ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted cycloalkyl(aryl) group;     -   xxix-a. R₅ is hydrogen;     -   xxx-a. R₆ is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched,         cyclic or acyclic, saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl;     -   xxxi-a. R₆ is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl,         tert-t-butyl, i-propyl, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂,         cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cyclobutyl or cyclopropyl;     -   xxxii-a. R₆ is tert-butyl;     -   xxxiii-a. The R₆-bearing carbon atom is of S configuration;     -   xxxiv-a. R₇ is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched,         cyclic or acyclic, saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl;     -   xxxv-a. R₇ is methyl;     -   xxxvi-a. R is —CH(R_(8a))C(R_(9a))═C(R_(10a))—; and         -   a) R_(8a) is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or             branched, cyclic or acyclic, saturated or unsaturated lower             alkyl;         -   b) R_(8a) is iso-propyl;         -   c) The R_(8a)-bearing carbon atom is of S configuration;         -   d) R_(9a) is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted,             linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, saturated or             unsaturated lower alkyl;         -   e) R_(9a) is hydrogen;         -   f) R_(10a) is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted,             linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, saturated or             unsaturated lower alkyl;         -   g) R_(10a) is methyl;     -   xxxvii-a. n is 1;     -   xxxviii-a. X₁ is C═O;     -   xxxix-a. X₁ is CH₂;     -   xl-a. X₁ is SO₂;     -   xli-a. X₂ is C═O;     -   xlii-a. X₂ is CH₂;     -   xliii-a. X₂ is SO₂;     -   xliv-a. Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q′), NR^(Q′)R^(″), N₃, ═N—OH, or a         moiety selected from the group consisting of:     -   wherein each occurrence of r is 0, 1 or 2; s and t are         independently an integer from 0-8; X is O, S, or NR^(K); each         occurrence of R^(Q1) and R^(Q2) is independently hydrogen,         halogen, —CN, —S(O)_(h)R^(J), —NO₂, —COR^(J), —CO₂R^(J),         —NR^(J)COR^(J), —NR^(J)CO₂R^(J), —CON^(J)R^(J),         —CO(NOR^(J))R^(J), aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or -Z_(t)R^(J);         wherein h is 1 or 2; and Z, is independently —O—, —S—, NR^(K),         —C(O)—, wherein each occurrence of R^(J) and R^(K) is         independently hydrogen, COR^(L), COOR^(L), CONR^(L)R^(M),         —NR^(L)R^(M), —S(O)₂R^(L), or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, and         wherein each occurrence of R^(L) and R^(M) is independently         hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and R^(Q′) and         R^(Q″) are independently hydrogen, or a substituted or         unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic alkyl or         heteroalkyl moiety, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or         heteroaryl moiety; or R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken together with the         nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a substituted or         unsubstituted heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and     -   xlv-a. Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q′), NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), N₃, ═N—OH, or a         moiety selected from the group consisting of:         -    wherein each occurrence of r is 0, 1 or 2; s and t are             independently an integer from 0-8; each occurrence of R^(Q1)             and R^(Q2) is independently hydrogen, or a substituted or             unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic alkyl             or heteroalkyl moiety, or a substituted or unsubstituted             aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or R^(Q1) and R^(Q2), taken             together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached,             form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic moiety; and             R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are independently hydrogen, or a             substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or             acyclic alkyl or heteroalkyl moiety, or a substituted or             unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or R^(Q′) and             R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they             are attached, form a substituted or unsubstituted             heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and/or     -   xliv-a. Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q′), NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), N₃, ═N—OH, or a         moiety selected from the group consisting of:         -    wherein each occurrence of r is 0, 1 or 2; and R^(Q′) and             R^(Q″) are independently hydrogen, or a substituted or             unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic alkyl             or heteroalkyl moiety, or a substituted or unsubstituted             aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken             together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached,             form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic, aryl or             heteroaryl moiety.

An important subclass of class (Ib) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ib) in which R is —C(R_(8b))C(R_(9b))N(R_(10b))C(R_(11b))—; and the compound has the following structure:

-   -   wherein R₁-R₇, n, X₁ and Q are defined in classes and subclasses         herein;     -   R_(8b), R_(9b), R_(10b) and R_(11b) are each independently         absent, hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(L) or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety,         wherein each occurrence of R_(L) is independently hydrogen, OH,         OR_(M), or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or wherein any two         R_(8b), R_(9b), R_(10b) and R_(11b) groups, taken together, form         a alicyclic or heteroalicyclic moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl         moiety; wherein R_(M) is an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and     -   NR₇ and CR_(8b), CR_(8b) and CR_(9b), CR_(9b) and NR_(10b),         NR_(10b) and CR_(11b) are each independently linked by a single         or double bond as valency permits.

Another important subclass of class (Ib) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ib) in which X₁ is C═O; R is —C(R_(8b))C(R_(9b))N(R_(10b))C(R_(11b))—; n is 1; R₃ is hydrogen; R₄ is a moiety having the structure —CR_(4a)R_(4b)R_(4c); and the compound has the following structure:

-   -   wherein R₁-R₂, R₅-R₇ and Q are defined in classes and subclasses         herein; and     -   R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each independently hydrogen or lower alkyl         and R_(4c) is aryl or heteroaryl;     -   R_(8b), R_(9b), R_(10b) and R_(11b) are each independently         absent, hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(L) or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety,         wherein each occurrence of R_(L) is independently hydrogen, OH,         OR_(M), or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or wherein any two         R_(8b), R_(9b), R_(10b) and R_(11b) groups, taken together, form         a alicyclic or heteroalicyclic moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl         moiety; wherein R_(M) is an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and     -   NR₇ and CR_(8b), CR_(8b) and CR_(9b), CR_(9b) and NR_(10b),         NR_(10b) and CR_(11b) are each independently linked by a single         or double bond as valency permits.

Another important subclass of class (Ib) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ib) in which R is —C(R_(8b))C(R_(9b))N(R_(10b))C(R_(11b))—; R_(10b) and R_(11b), taken together, form a substituted or unsubstituted cyclic heteroalkyl or heteroaryl moiety; and the compound has the following structure:

-   -   wherein R₁-R₇, n and Q are defined in classes and subclasses         herein;     -   p is 1, 2, 3 or 4;     -   q is 0-12;     -   each occurrence of S₁ is independently an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or         any two adjacent S₁ moieties, taken together, may form an an         alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   R_(8b) and R_(9b) are each independently absent, hydrogen,         —(C═O)R_(L) or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, wherein each         occurrence of R_(L) is independently hydrogen, OH, OR_(M), or an         aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or         heteroaryl moiety, or wherein R_(8b) and R_(9b), taken together,         form a alicyclic or heteroalicyclic moiety, or an aryl or         heteroaryl moiety; wherein R_(M) is an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and     -   NR₇ and CR₈, and CR_(8b) and CR_(9b) are each independently         linked by a single or double bond as valency permits.

Another important subclass of class (Ib) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ib) in which n is 1; R is C(R_(8b))C(R_(9b))N(R_(10b))C(R_(11b))—; R_(10b) and R_(11b), taken together, form a substituted or unsubstituted cyclic heteroalkyl or heteroaryl moiety; R₄ is a moiety having the structure —CR_(4a)R_(4b)R_(4c); and the compound has the following structure:

-   -   wherein R₁-R₇, X₁ and Q are defined in classes and subclasses         herein;     -   p is 1, 2, 3 or 4;     -   is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6;     -   each occurrence of S₁ is independently an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or         any two adjacent S₁ moieties, taken together, may form an an         alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each independently hydrogen or lower alkyl         or heteroalkyl; and R_(4c) is aryl or heteroaryl;     -   R_(8b) and R_(9b) are each independently hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(L)         or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic,         aryl or heteroaryl moiety, wherein each occurrence of R_(L) is         independently hydrogen, OH, OR_(M), or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or         wherein R_(8b) and R_(9b), taken together, form a alicyclic or         heteroalicyclic moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein         R_(M) is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and     -   NR₇ and CR_(8b), and CR_(8b) and CR_(9b) are each independently         linked by a single or double bond as valency permits.

Another important subclass of class (Ib) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ib) in which R is —C(R_(8c))C(R_(9c))C(R_(10c))C(R_(11c))OC(R_(12c))—; and the compound has the following structure:

-   -   wherein R₁-R₇, n, X₁ and Q are defined in classes and subclasses         herein;     -   R_(8c), R_(9c), R_(10c), R_(11c) and R_(12c) are each         independently absent, hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(L) or an aliphatic,         alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl         moiety, wherein each occurrence of R_(L) is independently         hydrogen, OH, OR_(M), or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or         wherein any two R_(8c), R_(9c), R_(10c), R_(11c) and R_(12c)         groups, taken together, form a alicyclic or heteroalicyclic         moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R_(M) is an         aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or         heteroaryl moiety; and     -   NR₇ and CR_(8c), CR_(8c) and CR_(9c), CR_(9c) and CR_(10c), and         CR10, and CR_(11c) are each independently linked by a single or         double bond as valency permits.

Another important subclass of class (Ib) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ib) in which X₁ is C═O; n is 1; R₃ is hydrogen; R₄ is a moiety having the structure —CR_(4a)R_(4b)R_(4c); R is —C(R_(8c))C(R_(9c))C(R_(10c))C(R_(11c))OC(R_(12c))—; and the compound has the following structure:

-   -   wherein R₁, R₂, R₅-R₇ and Q are defined in classes and         subclasses herein; R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each independently         hydrogen, or lower alkyl or heteroalkyl; and R_(4c) is aryl or         heteroaryl;     -   R_(8c), R_(9c), R_(10c), R_(11c) and R_(12c) are each         independently absent, hydrogen, (C═O)R_(L) or an aliphatic,         alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl         moiety, wherein each occurrence of R_(L) is independently         hydrogen, OH, OR_(M), or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or         wherein any two R_(8c), R_(9c), R_(10c), R_(11c) and R_(12c)         groups, taken together, form a alicyclic or heteroalicyclic         moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R_(M) is an         aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or         heteroaryl moiety; and     -   NR₇ and CR_(8c), CR_(8c) and CR_(9c), CR_(9c), and CR_(10c), and         CR_(10c) and CR_(11c) are each independently linked by a single         or double bond as valency permits.

A number of important subclasses of each of the foregoing subclasses of class (Ib) deserve separate mention; these subclasses include subclasses of the foregoing subclasses of class (Ib) in which:

-   -   i-b. R₁ and R₂ are independently hydrogen or substituted or         unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or         saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl)         or acyl;     -   ii-b. R₁ is hydrogen and R₂ is substituted or unsusbtituted,         linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, saturated or unsaturated         lower alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl) or acyl;     -   iii-b. R₁ is hydrogen and R₂ is substituted or unsusbtituted,         linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, saturated or unsaturated         lower alkyl;     -   iv-b. R₁ is hydrogen and R₂ is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl,         pentyl, tert-butyl, i-propyl, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₂CH₃,         —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)CH(CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)₂CH₂CH₃,         —CH(CH₃)cyclobutyl, —CH(Et)₂, —CH(CH₃)₂C CH, cyclohexyl,         cyclopentyl, cyclobutyl or cyclopropyl;     -   v-b. R₁ and R₂ are each hydrogen;     -   vi-b. The carbon atom bearing R₃ and R₄ is of S configuration;     -   vii-b. R₃ is hydrogen and R₄ is substituted or unsubstituted,         linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or         unsaturated lower alkyl, heteroalkyl or -alkyl(aryl) or         substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl;     -   viii-b. R₃ is hydrogen and R₄ is —CR_(4a)R_(4b)R_(4c); wherein         R_(4a) and R_(4b) are independently hydrogen, or a substituted         or unsusbtituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic,         saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl moiety and R_(4c) is         substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl;     -   ix-b. R₃ is hydrogen and R₄ is —CR_(4a)R_(4b)Ph; wherein R_(4a)         and R_(4b) are independently hydrogen, or a substituted or         unsusbtituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, saturated         or unsaturated lower alkyl moiety;     -   x-b. R₄ is a substituted or unsubstituted 3-indole moiety;     -   xi-b. R₃ is hydrogen;     -   xii-b. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted pyrrolidine group;     -   xii-b. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted piperidine group;     -   xiv-b. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted thiazolidine group;     -   xv-b. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted morpholine group;     -   xvi-b. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted thiomorpholine group;     -   xvii-b. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted indole group;     -   xviii-b. R₃ and R₄ are each independently substituted or         unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or         saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl, heteroalkyl or         -alkyl(aryl) or substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl;     -   xix-b. R₃ and R₄ are each independently substituted or         unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or         saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl, -alkyl(aryl) or         substituted or unsubstituted aryl;     -   xx-b. R₃ and R₄ are each independently substituted or         unsubstituted lower alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl;     -   xxi-b. R₃ and R₄ are each independently methyl, ethyl, propyl,         butyl, pentyl, tert-butyl, i-propyl, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃,         —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₂CH₃, —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)CH(CH₃)₂,         —CH(CH₃)₂CH₂CH₃, —CH(CH₃)cyclobutyl, —CH(Et)₂, cyclohexyl,         cyclopentyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopropyl, phenyl, —C₁₋₆alkylOR^(a),         —C₁₋₆alkylSR_(a) or —CR^(a)R^(b)R^(c);     -   wherein R^(a) and R^(b) are independently hydrogen, substituted         or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or         saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl and R^(c) is substituted or         unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl;     -   xxii-b. R₃ and R₄ are each independently methyl, ethyl, propyl,         butyl, pentyl, tert-butyl, i-propyl, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃,         —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₂CH₃, —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)CH(CH₃)₂,         —CH(CH₃)₂CH₂CH₃, —CH(CH₃)cyclobutyl, —CH(Et)₂, cyclohexyl,         cyclopentyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopropyl, phenyl, —C alkylOR^(a),         C₁₋₆alkylSR^(a) or —CR^(b)R^(c)Ph; wherein R^(a) is hydrogen,         substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or         acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl and R^(b) And         R^(c) are each independently substituted or unsubstituted linear         or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated         lower alkyl;     -   xxiii-b. R₃ and R₄ are each ethyl;     -   xxiv-b. R₃ is phenyl and R₄ is lower alkyl;     -   xxv-b. R₃ is phenyl and R₄ is ethyl;     -   xxvi-b. R₃ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted cycloalkyl group;     -   xxvii-b. R₃ and R₄, taken together, form a cyclohexyl group;     -   xxviii-b. R₃ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted cycloalkyl(aryl) group;     -   xxix-b. R₅ is hydrogen;     -   xxx-b. R₆ is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched,         cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl;     -   xxxi-b. R₆ is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, tert-butyl,         i-propyl, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl,         cyclobutyl or cyclopropyl;     -   xxxii-b. R₆ is tert-butyl;     -   xxxiii-b. The R₆-bearing carbon atom is of S configuration;     -   xxxiv-b. R₇ is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched,         cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl;     -   xxxv-b. R₇ is methyl;     -   xxxvi-b. R is —C(R_(8b))C(R_(9b))N(R_(10b))CR_(11b)— and         -   a) R_(8b) is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or             branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated             lower alkyl;         -   b) R_(8b) is iso-propyl;         -   c) The R_(8b)-bearing carbon atom is of S configuration;         -   d) R_(9b) is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted,             linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or             unsaturated lower alkyl;         -   e) R_(10b) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted, linear             or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated             lower alkyl or acyl;         -   f) R_(10b) is hydrogen, methyl or acetyl;         -   g) R_(10b) and R_(11b), taken together, form a substituted             or unsubstituted pyrrolidine ring; or         -   h) R_(9b) and R_(11b), taken together, form a substituted or             unsubstituted thiazole ring;     -   xxxvii-b. R is —C(R_(8c))C(R_(9c))C(R_(10c))CR_(11c)OR_(12c)—         and         -   a) R_(8c) is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or             branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated             lower alkyl;         -   b) R_(8c) is iso-propyl;         -   c) The R_(8c)-bearing carbon atom is of S configuration;         -   d) R_(9c) and R_(10c) are each independently hydrogen or             substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or             acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl;         -   e) CR_(9c) and CR_(10c) are linked via a double bond;         -   f) CR_(9c) and CR_(10c) are linked via a double bond and             R_(9c) is hydrogen; or         -   g) CR_(9c) and CR_(10c) are linked via a double bond and             R_(10c) is methyl;     -   xxxviii-b. n is 1;     -   xxxix-b. X₁ is C═O;     -   xl-b. X₁ is CH₂;     -   xli-b. X₁ is SO₂;     -   xlii-b. Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q′), NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), N₃, ═N—OH, or a         moiety selected from the group consisting of:         -    wherein each occurrence of r is 0, 1 or 2; s and t are             independently an integer from 0-8; X is O, S, or NR^(K);             each occurrence of R^(Q1) and R^(Q2) is independently             hydrogen, halogen, —CN, —S(O)_(h)R^(J), —NO₂, —COR^(J),             —CO₂R^(J), —NR^(J)COR, —NR^(J)CO₂R^(J), —CONR^(J)R^(J),             —CO(NOR^(J))R^(J), aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,             heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or -Z₁R^(J);             wherein h is 1 or 2; and Z₁ is independently —O—, —S—,             NR^(K), —C(O)—, wherein each occurrence of R^(J) and R^(K)             is independently hydrogen, COR^(L), COOR^(L), CONR^(L)R^(M),             —NR^(L)R^(M), —S(O)₂R^(L) or an aliphatic, alicyclic,             heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety,             and wherein each occurrence of R^(L) and R^(M) is             independently hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic,             heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;             and R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are independently hydrogen, or a             substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or             acyclic alkyl or heteroalkyl moiety, or a substituted or             unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or R^(Q′) and             R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they             are attached, form a substituted or unsubstituted             heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   xliii-b. Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q′), NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), N₃, ═N—OH, or a         moiety selected from the group consisting of:         -    wherein each occurrence of r is 0, 1 or 2; s and t are             independently an integer from 0-8; each occurrence of R^(Q1)             and R^(Q2) is independently hydrogen, or a substituted or             unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic alkyl             or heteroalkyl moiety, or a substituted or unsubstituted             aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or R^(Q1) and R^(Q2), taken             together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached,             form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic moiety; and             R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are independently hydrogen, or a             substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or             acyclic alkyl or heteroalkyl moiety, or a substituted or             unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or R^(Q′) and             R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they             are attached, form a substituted or unsubstituted             heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and/or     -   xliv-b. Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q′), NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), N₃, ═N—OH, or a         moiety selected from the group consisting of:         -    wherein each occurrence of r is 0, 1 or 2; and R^(Q′) and             R^(Q″) are independently hydrogen, or a substituted or             unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic alkyl             or heteroalkyl moiety, or a substituted or unsubstituted             aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken             together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached,             form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic, aryl or             heteroaryl moiety.

An important subclass of class (Ic) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ic) in which X₂ is C═O; R is —CH(R_(8a))C(R_(9a))═C(R_(10a))—; j is 0; 1 and in are each 1; R₃ is hydrogen; G is CR_(G1); M is CR_(M1)R_(M2), and the compound has the structure:

-   -   wherein R₂, R₅-R₇ and Q are defined in classes and subclasses         herein;     -   g is 1, 2, 3 or 4;     -   R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) are each independently hydrogen, or         an alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and wherein         any two R₇, R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) groups may form a cyclic         alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl), -heteroalykl(aryl),         -alkyl(heteroaryl) or -heteroalkyl(heteroaryl) moiety, or an         aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   L is CR_(L1)R_(L2), S, O or NR_(L3), wherein each occurrence of         R_(L1), R_(L2) and R_(L3) is independently hydrogen or an         aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or         heteroaryl moiety;     -   each occurrence of R_(G1), R_(M1) and R_(M2) is each         independently hydrogen or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   wherein any two adjacent R_(L1), R_(L2), R_(L3), R_(G1), R_(M1)         or R_(M2) groups, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted alicyclic or heteroalicyclic moiety containing 3-6         atoms or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety.

Another important subclass of class (Ic) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ic) in which X₂ is C═O; G, J and M are each CH₂; j, l and m are each 1; R is —CH(R_(8a))C(R_(9a))═C(R_(10a))—; R₃ is hydrogen; and the compound has the structure:

-   -   wherein R₂, R₅-R₇ and Q are defined in classes and subclasses         herein;     -   g is 0, 1, 2 or 3;     -   R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) are each independently hydrogen, or         an alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and wherein         any two R₇, R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) groups may form a cyclic         alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl), -heteroalykl(aryl),         -alkyl(heteroaryl) or -heteroalkyl(heteroaryl) moiety, or an         aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   R_(L1) and R_(L2) are independently hydrogen or an aliphatic,         alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl         moiety.

Another important subclass of class (Ic) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ic) in which X₂ is C═O; R is —C(R_(8b))C(R_(9b))N(R_(10b))C(R_(11b))—; j is 0; 1 and m are each 1; R₃ is hydrogen; G is CHR_(G1), M is CR_(M1)R_(M2), and the compound has the structure:

-   -   wherein R₂, R₅-R₇ and Q are defined in classes and subclasses         herein;     -   g is 1, 2 or 3;     -   L is CR_(L1)R_(L2), S, O or NR_(L3), wherein each occurrence of         R_(L1), R_(L2) and R_(L3) is independently hydrogen or an         aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or         heteroaryl moiety;     -   each occurrence of R_(G1), R_(M1) and R_(M2) is independently         hydrogen or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   any two adjacent R_(L1), R_(L2), R_(L3), R_(G1), R_(M1) or         R_(M2) groups, taken together, may form a substituted or         unsubstituted alicyclic or heteroalicyclic moiety containing 3-6         atoms or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   R_(8b), R_(9b), R_(10b) and R_(11b) are each independently         absent, hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(L) or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety,         wherein each occurrence of R_(L) is independently hydrogen, OH,         OR_(M), or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or wherein any two         adjacent R_(8b), R_(9b), R_(10b) and R_(11b) groups, taken         together, form a alicyclic or heteroalicyclic moiety, or an aryl         or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R_(M) is an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and     -   NR₇ and CR_(8b), CR_(8b) and CR_(9b), CR_(9b) and NR_(10b),         NR_(10b) and CR_(11b) are each independently linked by a single         or double bond as valency permits.

Another important subclass of class (Ic) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ic) in which X₂ is C═O; R is (R_(8b))C(R_(9b))N(R_(10b))C(R_(11b))—; j is 0; 1 and m are each 1; R₃ is hydrogen; G is CHR_(G1), M is CR_(M1)R_(M2); R_(10b) and R_(11b), taken together, form a cyclic heteroalkyl group; and the compound has the structure:

-   -   wherein R₂, R₅-R₇ and Q are defined in classes and subclasses         herein;     -   p is 1, 2, 3 or 4;     -   q is 0-12;     -   each occurrence of S₁ is independently an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or         any two adjacent S₁ moieties, taken together, may form an an         alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   R_(8b) and R_(9b) are each independently absent, hydrogen,         —(C═O)R_(L) or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, wherein each         occurrence of R_(L) is independently hydrogen, OH, OR_(M), or an         aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or         heteroaryl moiety, or wherein R_(8b) and R_(9b), taken together,         form a alicyclic or heteroalicyclic moiety, or an aryl or         heteroaryl moiety; wherein R_(M) is an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and     -   NR₇ and CR_(8b), and CR_(8b) and CR_(9b) are each independently         linked by a single or double bond as valency permits.

Another important subclass of class (Ic) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ic) in which X₂ is C═O; G, J and M are each CH₂; j, l and m are each 1; R is —C(R_(8b))C(R_(9b))N(R_(10b))C(R_(11b))—; R₃ is hydrogen; and the compound has the structure:

-   -   wherein R₂, R₅-R₇ and Q are defined in classes and subclasses         herein;     -   g is 0, 1, 2 or 3;     -   R_(L1) and R_(L2) are independently hydrogen or an aliphatic,         alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl         moiety;     -   R_(8b), R_(9b), R_(10b) and R_(11b) are each independently         absent, hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(L) or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety,         wherein each occurrence of R_(L) is independently hydrogen, OH,         OR_(M), or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or wherein any two         adjacent R_(8b), R_(9b), R_(10b) and R_(11b) groups, taken         together, form a alicyclic or heteroalicyclic moiety, or an aryl         or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R_(M) is an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and     -   NR₇ and CR_(8b), CR_(9b) and CR_(9b), CR_(9b) and NR_(10b),         NR_(10b) and CR_(11b) are each independently linked by a single         or double bond as valency permits.

Another important subclass of class (Ic) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ic) in which X₂ is C═O; G, J and M are each CH₂; j, l and m are each 1; R is —C(R_(8b))C(R_(9b))N(R_(10b))C(R_(11b))—; R₃ is hydrogen; R_(10b) and R_(11b), taken together, form a cyclic heteroalkyl group; and the compound has the structure:

-   -   wherein R₂, R₅-R₇ and Q are defined in classes and subclasses         herein;     -   p is 1, 2, 3 or 4;     -   q is 0-12;     -   g is 0, 1, 2 or 3;     -   R_(L1) and R_(L2) are independently hydrogen or an aliphatic,         alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl         moiety;     -   each occurrence of S₁ is independently an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or         any two adjacent S₁ moieties, taken together, may form an an         alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   R_(8b) and R_(9b) are each independently hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(L)         or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic,         aryl or heteroaryl moiety, wherein each occurrence of R_(L) is         independently hydrogen, OH, OR_(M), or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or         wherein R_(8b) and R_(9b), taken together, form a alicyclic or         heteroalicyclic moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein         R_(M) is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and     -   NR₇ and CR_(8b), and CR_(8b) and CR_(9b) are each independently         linked by a single or double bond as valency permits.

Another important subclass of class (Ic) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ic) in which X₂ is C═O; R is —C(R_(8c))C(R_(9c))C(R_(10c))C(R_(11c))OC(R_(12c))—; j is 0; 1 and m are each 1; R₃ is hydrogen; G is CHR_(G1), M is CR_(M1)R_(M2); and the compound has the following structure:

-   -   wherein R₁, R₂, R₅-R₇ and Q are defined in classes and         subclasses herein;     -   g is 1, 2 or 3;     -   L is CR_(L1)R_(L2), S, O or NR_(L3), wherein each occurrence of         R_(L1), R_(L2) and R_(L3) is independently hydrogen or an         aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or         heteroaryl moiety;     -   each occurrence of R_(G1), R_(M1) and R_(M2) is independently         hydrogen or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   any two adjacent R_(L1), R_(L2), R_(L3), R_(G1), R_(M1) or         R_(M2) groups, taken together, may form a substituted or         unsubstituted alicyclic or heteroalicyclic moiety containing 3-6         atoms or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   R_(8c), R_(9c), R_(10c), R_(11c) and R_(12c) are each         independently absent, hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(L) or an aliphatic,         alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl         moiety, wherein each occurrence of R_(L) is independently         hydrogen, OH, OR_(M), or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or         wherein any two R_(8c), R_(9c), R_(10c), R_(11c) and R_(12c)         groups, taken together, form a alicyclic or heteroalicyclic         moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R_(M) is an         aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or         heteroaryl moiety; and     -   NR₇ and CR_(9c), CR_(8c) and CR_(9c), CR_(9c) and CR_(10c), and         CR_(10c) and CR_(11c) are each independently linked by a single         or double bond as valency permits.

Another important subclass of class (Ic) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Ic) in which X₂ is C═O; R is —C(R_(8c))C(R_(9c))C(R_(10c))C(R_(11c))OC(R_(12c))—; G, J and M are each CH₂; j, l and m are each 1; R₃ is hydrogen; and the compound has the following structure:

-   -   wherein R₁, R₂, R₅-R₇ and Q are defined in classes and         subclasses herein;     -   g is 0, 1, 2 or 3;     -   R_(L1) and R_(L2) are independently hydrogen or an aliphatic,         alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl         moiety;     -   R_(8c), R_(9c), R_(10c), R_(11c) and R_(12c) are each         independently absent, hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(L) or an aliphatic,         alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl         moiety, wherein each occurrence of R_(L) is independently         hydrogen, OH, OR_(M), or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or         wherein any two R_(8c), R_(9c), R_(10c), R_(11c) and R_(12c)         groups, taken together, form a alicyclic or heteroalicyclic         moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R_(M) is an         aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or         heteroaryl moiety; and     -   NR₇ and CR_(8c), CR_(8c) and CR_(9c), CR_(9c) and CR_(10c), and         CR_(10c) and CR_(11c) are each independently linked by a single         or double bond as valency permits.

A number of important subclasses of each of the foregoing subclasses of class (Ic) deserve separate mention; these subclasses include subclasses of the foregoing subclasses of class (Ic) in which:

-   -   i-c. R₂ is hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted, linear         or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated         lower alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl) or acyl moiety;     -   ii-c. R₂ is substituted or unsusbtituted, linear or branched,         cyclic or acyclic, saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl,         heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl) or acyl;     -   iii-c. R₂ is substituted or unsusbtituted, linear or branched,         cyclic or acyclic, saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl;     -   iv-c. R₂ is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, tert-butyl,         i-propyl, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₂CH₃, —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂,         —CH(CH₃)CH(CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)₂CH₂CH₃, —CH(CH₃)cyclobutyl, —CH(Et)₂,         —CH(CH₃)₂C CH, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cyclobutyl or         cyclopropyl;     -   v-c. R₂ is hydrogen;     -   vi-c. R₂ is hydrogen, methyl or benzyl;     -   vii-c. R₂ is methyl;     -   viii-c. R₂ is acyl, wherein the acyl group is a nitrogen         proteting group;     -   ix-c. R₃ is hydrogen;     -   x-c. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted pyrrolidine group;     -   xi-c. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted piperidine group;     -   xii-c. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted thiazolidine group;     -   xiii-c. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted morpholine group;     -   xiv-c. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted thiomorpholine group;     -   xv-c. R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted indole group;     -   xvi-c. R₅ is hydrogen;     -   xvii-c. R₆ is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched,         cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl;     -   xviii-c. R₆ is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, tert-butyl,         i-propyl, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl,         cyclobutyl or cyclopropyl;     -   xix-c. R₆ is tert-butyl;     -   xx-c. The R₆-bearing carbon atom is of S configuration;     -   xxi-c. R₇ is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched,         cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl;     -   xxii-c. R₇ is methyl;     -   xxiii-c. R is —CH(R_(8a))C(R_(9a))═C(R_(10a))—; and         -   a) R_(8a) is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or             branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated             lower alkyl;         -   b) R_(8a) is iso-propyl;         -   c) The R_(8a)-bearing carbon atom is of S configuration;         -   d) R_(9a) is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted,             linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or             unsaturated lower alkyl;         -   e) R_(9a) is hydrogen;         -   f) R_(10a) is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted,             linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or             unsaturated lower alkyl; or         -   g) R_(10a) is methyl;     -   xxiv-c. R is —C(R_(8b))C(R_(9b))N(R_(10b))CR_(11b)— and         -   a) R_(8b) is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or             branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated             lower alkyl;         -   b) R_(8b) is iso-propyl;         -   c) The R_(8b)-bearing carbon atom is of S configuration;         -   d) R_(9b) is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted,             linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or             unsaturated lower alkyl;         -   e) R_(10b) is hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted,             linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or             unsaturated lower alkyl or acyl moiety;         -   f) R_(10b) is hydrogen, methyl or acetyl;         -   g) R_(10b) and R_(11b), taken together, form a substituted             or unsubstituted pyrrolidine ring; or         -   h) R_(9b) and R_(11b), taken together, form a substituted or             unsubstituted thiazole ring;     -   xxxv-d. R is —C(R_(8c))C(R_(9c))C(R_(10c))CR_(11c)OR_(12c)— and         -   a) R_(8c) is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or             branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated             lower alkyl;         -   b) R_(8c) is iso-propyl;         -   c) The R_(8c)-bearing carbon atom is of S configuration;         -   d) R_(9c) and R_(10c) are each independently hydrogen or             substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or             acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl;         -   e) CR_(9c) and CR_(10c) are linked via a double bond;         -   f) CR_(9c) and CR_(10c) are linked via a double bond and             R_(9c) is hydrogen; or         -   g) CR_(9c) and CR_(10c) are linked via a double bond and             R_(10c) is methyl;     -   xxv-c. —C(R₃)(R₄)N(R₁)(R₂) together represent the moiety having         the structure:         -   a) R₂ is hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted, linear             or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated             lower alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl) or acyl moiety;         -   b) R₂ is methyl, ethyl or propyl;         -   c) R_(G1) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted, linear             or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated             lower alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted phenyl;         -   d) R_(G1) is hydrogen, methyl or phenyl;         -   e) R_(G1) and the substituents on L, taken together, form a             substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group;         -   f) R_(M1) and R_(M2) are each independently hydrogen,             hydroxyl, a substituted or unsubstituted, linear or             branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated             lower alkyl moiety; a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl             moiety, or R_(M2) is absent when R_(M1) and the             substitutents on L, taken together, form a substituted or             unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl moiety;         -   g) g is 1 or 2; or         -   h) L is CH₂, S or O;     -   xxvi-c. —C(R₃)(R₄)N(R₁)(R₂) together represent the moiety having         the structure:         -   a) R₂ is hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted, linear             or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated             lower alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl) or acyl moiety;         -   b) R₂ is methyl;         -   c) R_(L1) and R_(L2) are each independently hydrogen,             substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or             acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl or             substituted or unsubstituted phenyl;         -   d) R_(L1) and R_(L2) are each hydrogen;         -   e) R_(L1) and R_(L2) are each substituted or unsubstituted,             linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or             unsaturated lower alkyl; or         -   f) g is 1 or 2;     -   xxvii-c. X₂ is C═O;     -   xxviii-c. X₂ is CH₂;     -   xxix-c. X₂ is SO₂;     -   xxx-c. Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q′), NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), N₃, ═N—OH, or a         moiety selected from the group consisting of:         -    wherein each occurrence of r is 0, 1 or 2; s and t are             independently an integer from 0-8; X is O, S, or NR^(K);             each occurrence of R^(Q1) and R^(Q2) is independently             hydrogen, halogen, —CN, —S(O)_(h)R^(J), —NO₂, —COR^(J),             —COR^(J), —NR^(J)COR^(J), —NR^(J)CO₂R^(J), —CONR^(J)R^(J),             —CO(NOR^(J))R^(J), aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,             heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or -Z₁R^(J);             wherein h is 1 or 2; and Z₁ is independently —O—, —S—,             NR^(K), —C(O)—, wherein each occurrence of R^(J) and R^(K)             is independently hydrogen, COR^(L), COOR^(L), CONR^(L)R^(M),             —NR^(L)R^(M), —S(O)₂R^(L), or an aliphatic, alicyclic,             heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety,             and wherein each occurrence of R_(L) and R_(M) is             independently hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic,             heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;             and R^(Q′ and R) ^(Q″) are independently hydrogen, or a             substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or             acyclic alkyl or heteroalkyl moiety, or a substituted or             unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or R^(Q′) and             R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they             are attached, form a substituted or unsubstituted             heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   xxxi-c. Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q′), NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), N₃, ═N—OH, or a         moiety selected from the group consisting of:         -    wherein each occurrence of r is 0, 1 or 2; s and t are             independently an integer from 0-8; each occurrence of R^(Q1)             and R^(Q2) is independently hydrogen, or a substituted or             unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic alkyl             or heteroalkyl moiety, or a substituted or unsubstituted             aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or R^(Q1) and R^(Q2), taken             together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached,             form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic moiety; and             R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are independently hydrogen, or a             substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or             acyclic alkyl or heteroalkyl moiety, or a substituted or             unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or R^(Q′) and             R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they             are attached, form a substituted or unsubstituted             heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and/or     -   xxxii-c. Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q′), NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), N₃, ═N—OH, or a         moiety selected from the group consisting of:         -    wherein each occurrence of r is 0, 1 or 2; and R^(Q′) and             R^(Q″) are independently hydrogen, or a substituted or             unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic alkyl             or heteroalkyl moiety, or a substituted or unsubstituted             aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken             together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached,             form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic, aryl or             heteroaryl moiety.

An important subclass of class (Id) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Id) in which R is —CH(R_(8a))C(R_(9a))═C(R_(10a))—; X₂ is C═O; and the compound has the following structure:

-   -   wherein R₃ and R₄ are each independently an aliphatic,         alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl         moiety, or, when taken together, form an alicyclic,         heteroalicyclic, alicyclic(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl),         alicyclic(heteroaryl) or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety, R₁,         R₂, R₅-R₇ and Q are defined in classes and subclasses herein;         and     -   R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) are each independently hydrogen, or         an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl         or heteroaryl moiety; and wherein any two R₇, R_(8a), R_(9a) and         R_(10a) groups may form an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic,         alicyclicc(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl)         or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl         moiety.

Another important subclass of class (Id) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Id) in which R is —C(R_(8b))C(R_(9b))N(R_(10b))C(R_(11b))—; X₂ is C═O; and the compound has the following structure:

-   -   wherein R₃ and R₄ are each independently an aliphatic,         alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl         moiety, or, when taken together, form an alicyclic,         heteroalicyclic, alicyclic(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl),         alicyclic(heteroaryl) or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety; R₁,         R₂, R₅-R₇ and Q are defined in classes and subclasses herein;     -   R_(8b), R_(9b), R_(10b) and R_(11b) are each independently         absent, hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(L) or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety,         wherein each occurrence of R_(L) is independently hydrogen, OH,         OR_(M), or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or wherein any two         R_(8b), R_(9b), R_(10b) and R_(11b) groups, taken together, form         a alicyclic or heteroalicyclic moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl         moiety; wherein R_(M) is an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and     -   NR₇ and CR_(9b), CR_(8b) and CR_(9b), CR_(9b) and NR_(10b),         NR_(10b) and CR_(11b) are independently linked by a single or         double bond as valency permits.

Another important subclass of class (Id) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Id) in which R is —C(R_(8b))C(R_(9b))N(R_(10b))C(R_(11b))—; X₂ is C═O; R_(10b) and R_(11b), taken together, form a cyclic heteroalkyl group; and the compound has the following structure:

-   -   wherein R₃ and R₄ are each independently an aliphatic,         alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl         moiety, or, when taken together, form an alicyclic,         heteroalicyclic, alicyclic(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl),         alicyclic(heteroaryl) or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety; R₁,         R₂, R₅-R₇ and Q are defined in classes and subclasses herein;     -   p is 1, 2, 3 or 4;     -   q is 0-12;     -   each occurrence of S₁ is independently an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or         any two adjacent S₁ moieties, taken together, may form an an         alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   R_(8b) and R_(9b) are each independently hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(L)         or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic,         aryl or heteroaryl moiety, wherein each occurrence of R_(L) is         independently hydrogen, OH, OR_(M), or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or         wherein R_(8b) and R_(9b), taken together, form a alicyclic or         heteroalicyclic moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein         R_(M) is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,         heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and     -   NR₇ and CR₈, and CR_(8b) and CR_(9b) are independently linked by         a single or double bond as valency permits.

Another important subclass of class (Id) includes those compounds having the structure of formula (Id) in which X₂ is C═O; R is —C(R_(8c))C(R_(9c))C(R_(10c))C(R_(11c))OC(R_(12c))—; and the compound has the following structure:

-   -   wherein R₃ and R₄ are each independently an aliphatic,         alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl         moiety, or, when taken together, form an alicyclic,         heteroalicyclic, alicyclic(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl),         alicyclic(heteroaryl) or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety; R₁,         R₂, R₅-R₇ and Q are defined in classes and subclasses herein;     -   R_(8c), R_(9c), R_(10c), R_(11c) and R_(12c) are each         independently absent, hydrogen, (C═O)R_(L) or an aliphatic,         alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl         moiety, wherein each occurrence of R_(L) is independently         hydrogen, OH, OR_(M), or an aliphatic, alicyclic,         heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or         wherein any two R_(8c), R_(9c), R_(10c), R_(11c) and R_(12c)         groups, taken together, form a alicyclic or heteroalicyclic         moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R_(M) is an         aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or         heteroaryl moiety; and     -   NR₇ and CR_(8c), CR_(8c) and CR_(9c), CR_(9c) and CR_(10c), and         CR_(10c) and CR_(11c) are each independently linked by a single         or double bond as valency permits.

A number of important subclasses of each of the foregoing subclasses of class (Id) deserve separate mention; these subclasses include subclasses of the foregoing subclasses of class (Id) in which:

-   -   i-d. R₁ and R₂ are independently hydrogen or substituted or         unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or         saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl)         or acyl;     -   ii-d. R₁ is hydrogen and R₂ is substituted or unsusbtituted,         linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, saturated or unsaturated         lower alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl) or acyl;     -   iii-d. R₁ is hydrogen and R₂ is substituted or unsusbtituted,         linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, saturated or unsaturated         lower alkyl;     -   iv-d. R₁ is hydrogen and R₂ is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl,         pentyl, tert-butyl, i-propyl, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃; —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₂CH₃,         —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)CH(CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)₂CH₂CH₃,         —CH(CH₃)cyclobutyl, —CH(Et)₂, —CH(CH₃)₂C CH, cyclohexyl,         cyclopentyl, cyclobutyl or cyclopropyl;     -   v-d. R₁ and R₂ are each hydrogen;     -   vi-d. R₁ and R₂ are independently hydrogen or methyl;     -   vii-d. R₁ and R₂ are each methyl;     -   viii-d. R₃ and R₄ are each independently substituted or         unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or         saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl, heteroalkyl or         -alkyl(aryl) or substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl;     -   ix-d. R₃ and R₄ are each independently substituted or         unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or         saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl, -alkyl(aryl) or         substituted or unsubstituted aryl;     -   x-d. R₃ and R₄ are each independently substituted or         unsubstituted lower alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl;     -   xi-d. R₃ and R₄ are each independently methyl, ethyl, propyl,         butyl, pentyl, tert-butyl, i-propyl, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃,         —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₂CH₃, —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)CH(CH₃)₂,         —CH(CH₃)₂CH₂CH₃, —CH(CH₃)cyclobutyl, —CH(Et)₂, cyclohexyl,         cyclopentyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopropyl, phenyl, —C₁₋₆alkylOR^(a),         —C₁₋₆alkylSR^(a) or —CR^(a)R^(b)R^(c); wherein R^(a) and R^(b)         are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted, linear         or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated         lower alkyl and R^(c) is substituted or unsubstituted aryl or         heteroaryl;     -   xii-d. R₃ and R₄ are each independently methyl, ethyl, propyl,         butyl, pentyl, tert-butyl, i-propyl, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃,         —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₂CH₃, —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)CH(CH₃)₂,         —CH(CH₃)₂CH₂CH₃, —CH(CH₃)cyclobutyl, —CH(Et)₂, cyclohexyl,         cyclopentyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopropyl, phenyl, —C₁₋₆alkylO^(a),         —C₁₋₆alkylSR^(a) or —CR^(b)R^(c)Ph; wherein R^(a) is hydrogen,         substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or         acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl and R^(b) And         R^(c) are each independently substituted or unsubstituted linear         or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated         lower alkyl;     -   xiii-d. R₃ and R₄ are each ethyl;     -   xiv-d. R₃ is phenyl and R₄ is lower alkyl;     -   xv-d. R₃ is phenyl and R₄ is ethyl;     -   xvi-d. R₃ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted cycloalkyl group;     -   xvii-d. R₃ and R₄, taken together, form a cyclohexyl group;     -   xviii-d. R₃ and R₄, taken together, form a substituted or         unsubstituted cycloalkyl(aryl) group;     -   xix-d. R₅ is hydrogen;     -   xx-d. R₆ is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched,         cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl;     -   xxi-d. R₆ is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, tert-butyl,         i-propyl, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl,         cyclobutyl or cyclopropyl;     -   xxii-d. R₆ is tert-butyl;     -   xxiii-d. The R₆-bearing carbon atom is of S configuration;     -   xxiv-d. R₇ is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched,         cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl;     -   xxv-d. R₇ is methyl;     -   xxvi-d. R is —CH(R_(8a))C(R_(9a))═C(R_(10a))—; and         -   i) R_(8a) is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or             branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated             lower alkyl;         -   j) R_(8a) is iso-propyl;         -   k) The R_(8a)-bearing carbon atom is of S configuration;         -   l) R_(9a) is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted,             linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or             unsaturated lower alkyl;         -   m) R_(9a) is hydrogen;         -   n) R_(10a) is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted,             linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or             unsaturated lower alkyl; or         -   o) R_(10a) is methyl;     -   xxvii-d. R is —C(R_(8b))C(R_(9b))N(R_(10b))CR_(11b)— and         -   p) R_(8b) is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or             branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated             lower alkyl;         -   q) R_(8b) is iso-propyl;         -   r) The R_(8b)-bearing carbon atom is of S configuration;         -   s) R_(9b) is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted,             linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or             unsaturated lower alkyl;         -   t) R_(10b) is hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted,             linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or             unsaturated lower alkyl or acyl moiety;         -   u) R_(10b) is hydrogen, methyl or acetyl;         -   v) R_(10b) and R_(11b), taken together, form a substituted             or unsubstituted pyrrolidine ring; or         -   w) R_(9b) and R_(11b), taken together, form a substituted or             unsubstituted thiazole ring;     -   xxviii-d. R is —C(R_(8c))C(R_(9c))C(R_(10c))CR_(11c)OCR_(12c)—         and         -   h) R_(8c) is substituted or unsubstituted, linear or             branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated             lower alkyl;         -   i) R_(8c) is iso-propyl;         -   j) The R_(8c)-bearing carbon atom is of S configuration;         -   k) R_(9c) and R_(10c) are each independently hydrogen or             substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or             acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated lower alkyl;         -   l) CR_(9c) and CR_(10c) are linked via a double bond;         -   m) CR_(9c) and CR_(10c) are linked via a double bond and             R_(9c) is hydrogen; or         -   n) CR_(9c) and CR_(10c) are linked via a double bond and             R_(10c) is methyl;     -   xxix-d. X₂ is C═O;     -   xxx-d. X₂ is CH₂;     -   xxxi-d. X₂ is SO₂;     -   xxxii-d. Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q′), NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), N₃, ═N—OH, or a         moiety selected from the group consisting of:         -    wherein each occurrence of r is 0, 1 or 2; s and t are             independently an integer from 0-8; X is O, S, or NR^(K);             each occurrence of R^(Q1) and R^(Q2) is independently             hydrogen, halogen, —CN, —S(O)_(h)R^(J), —NO₂, —COR^(J),             —CO₂R^(J), —NR^(J)COR^(J), —NR^(J)CO₂R^(J), —CONR^(J)R^(J),             —CO(NOR^(J))R^(J), aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic,             heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or -Z₁R^(J);             wherein h is 1 or 2; and Z₁ is independently —O—, —S—,             NR^(K), —C(O)—, wherein each occurrence of R₁ and R^(K) is             independently hydrogen, COR^(L), COOR^(L), CONR^(L)R^(M),             —NR^(L)R^(M), —S(O)₂R^(L), or an aliphatic, alicyclic,             heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety,             and wherein each occurrence of R_(L) and R_(M) is             independently hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic,             heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;             and R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are independently hydrogen, or a             substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or             acyclic alkyl or heteroalkyl moiety, or a substituted or             unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or R^(Q′) and             R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they             are attached, form a substituted or unsubstituted             heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety;     -   xxxiii-d. Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q′), NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), N₃, ═N—OH, or a         moiety selected from the group consisting of:         -    wherein each occurrence of r is 0, 1 or 2; s and t are             independently an integer from 0-8; each occurrence of R^(Q1)             and R^(Q2) is independently hydrogen, or a substituted or             unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic alkyl             or heteroalkyl moiety, or a substituted or unsubstituted             aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or R^(Q1) and R^(Q2), taken             together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached,             form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic moiety; and             R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are independently hydrogen, or a             substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or             acyclic alkyl or heteroalkyl moiety, or a substituted or             unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or R^(Q′) and             R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they             are attached, form a substituted or unsubstituted             heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and/or     -   xxxiv-d. Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q′), NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), N₃, ═N—OH, —N—OH,         or a moiety selected from the group consisting of:         -    wherein each occurrence of r is 0, 1 or 2; and R^(Q′) and             R^(Q″) are independently hydrogen, or a substituted or             unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic alkyl             or heteroalkyl moiety, or a substituted or unsubstituted             aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken             together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached,             form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic, aryl or             heteroaryl moiety.

As the reader will appreciate, compounds of particular interest include, among others, those which share the attributes of one or more of the foregoing subclasses. Some of those subclasses are illustrated by the following sorts of compounds:

I) Compounds of the Formula (and Pharmaceutically Acceptable Derivatives Thereof):

-   -   wherein R₁-R₂, R_(4a), R_(4b), R_(9a)-R_(10a) and Q are as         defined above and in subclasses herein; and Ar is a substituted         or unsubstitued aryl or heteroaryl moiety.

II) Compounds of the Formula (and Pharmaceutically Acceptable Derivatives Thereof):

-   -   wherein A, B, D, E, a, b, d, e, R₁-R₂, R_(4a), R_(4b), and         R_(9a)-R_(10a) are as defined above and in subclasses herein;         and Ar is a substituted or unsubstitued aryl or heteroaryl         moiety.

It will also be appreciated that for each of the subgroups I-II described above, a variety of other subclasses are of special interest, including, but not limited to those classes i-a. through xliv-a. described above and classes, subclasses and species of compounds described above and in the examples herein.

III) Compounds of the Formula (and Pharmaceutically Acceptable Derivatives Thereof):

-   -   wherein R₁-R₂, R_(4a), R_(4b), R_(9b)-R_(11b) and R_(G) are as         defined above and in subclasses herein; and Ar is a substituted         or unsubstitued aryl or heteroaryl moiety.

IV) Compounds of the Formula (and Pharmaceutically Acceptable Derivatives Thereof):

-   -   wherein A, B, D, E, a, b, d, e, R₁-R₂, R_(4a), R_(4b), and         R_(9b)-R_(11b) are as defined above and in subclasses herein;         and Ar is a substituted or unsubstitued aryl or heteroaryl         moiety.

V) Compounds of the Formula (and Pharmaceutically Acceptable Derivatives Thereof):

-   -   wherein R₁-R₂, R_(4a), R_(4b), R₉, —R_(12c) and R_(G) are as         defined above and in subclasses herein; and Ar is a substituted         or unsubstitued aryl or heteroaryl moiety.

It will also be appreciated that for each of the subgroups III-V described above, a variety of other subclasses are of special interest, including, but not limited to those classes i-b. through xlii-b. described above and classes, subclasses and species of compounds described above and in the examples herein.

VI) Compounds of the Formula (and Pharmaceutically Acceptable Derivatives Thereof):

-   -   wherein L, R_(9a)-R_(10a), R_(G1), R_(M1) and R_(M2) are as         defined above and in subclasses herein; g is 1 or 2; Q is         OR^(Q′), wherein R^(Q′) is hydrogen or lower alkyl; and R₂ and         R₆ are independently substituted or unsubstituted linear or         branched lower alkyl.

VII) Compounds of the Formula (and Pharmaceutically Acceptable Derivatives Thereof):

-   -   wherein g, R_(9a)-R_(10a), R_(L1) and R_(L2) are as defined         above and in subclasses herein; X₁ is CH₂ or C═O; R₂ and R₆ are         independently substituted or unsubstituted linear or branched         lower alkyl; and Q is OR^(Q′) or NR^(Q′)R^(Q″) wherein R^(Q′) is         hydrogen or lower alkyl, or R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken together         with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a         substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic moiety, whereby each         of the foregoing alkyl moieties may be substituted or         unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic.

VIII) Compounds of the Formula (and Pharmaceutically Acceptable Derivatives Thereof):

-   -   wherein A, B, D, E, L, a, b, d, e, p, R_(9b), R^(G1), R^(M1) and         R_(M2) are as defined above and in subclasses herein; g is 1 or         2; and R₂ and R₆ are independently substituted or unsubstituted         linear or branched lower alkyl.

IX) Compounds of the Formula (and Pharmaceutically Acceptable Derivatives Thereof):

-   -   wherein p, R_(9b), R_(L1), R_(L2), R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are as         defined above and in subclasses herein; and R₂ and R₆ are         independently substituted or unsubstituted linear or branched         lower alkyl.

It will also be appreciated that for each of the subgroups VI-IX described above, a variety of other subclasses are of special interest, including, but not limited to those classes i-c. through xxxii-c. described above and classes, subclasses and species of compounds described above and in the examples herein. In certain embodiments, for compounds of subgroups VI-IX above, R₂ is methyl, iso-propyl, sec-butyl or —CH(CH₃)CH(CH₃)₂. In certain embodiments, for compounds of subgroups VI-IX above, R₆ is tert-butyl or iso-propyl. In certain embodiments, for compounds of subgroups VI-IX above, R₂ is methyl, iso-propyl, see-butyl or —CH(CH₃)CH(CH₃)₂, and R₆ is tert-butyl or iso-propyl. In certain exemplary embodiments, for compounds of subgroups VI-IX above, R₂ is methyl and R₆ is tert-butyl. In certain exemplary embodiments, for compounds of subgroups VI-IX above, R₂ is iso-propyl and R₆ is tert-butyl. In certain exemplary embodiments, for compounds of subgroups VI-IX above, R₂ is sec-butyl and R₆ is tert-butyl or iso-propyl. In certain exemplary embodiments, for compounds of subgroups VI-IX above, R₂ is —CH(CH₃)CH(CH₃)₂, and R₆ is tert-butyl.

X) Compounds of the Formula (and Pharmaceutically Acceptable Derivatives Thereof):

-   -   wherein R₁, R_(9a), R_(10a) and R_(G) are as defined above and         in subclasses herein; and R₃ and R₄ are each independently an         alkyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkyl(aryl) or alkyl(aryl) moiety, or         R₃ and R₄, taken together, form a cyclic alkyl or heteroalkyl         moiety.

It will also be appreciated that for subgroup X described above, a variety of other subclasses are of special interest, including, but not limited to those classes i-d. through xxxii-d. described above and classes, subclasses and species of compounds described above and in the examples herein.

Some of the foregoing compounds can comprise one or more asymmetric centers, and thus can exist in various isomeric forms, e.g., stereoisomers and/or diastereomers. It is to be understood that the invention encompasses every possible isomer such as geometric isomer, optical isomer, stereoisomer and tautomer based on asymmetric carbon, which can occur in the structures of the inventive compounds, and mixtures of such isomers, and is not limited to the specific stereochemistry shown for the compounds disclosed in the present specification. It will be further appreciated that the absolute stereochemistry of some of the compounds recited in the Exemplification herein has not been determined, and that when a stereochemistry was assigned for those compounds it is meant to be tentative and to indicate that a set of diastereomers exists for those compounds and/ot that a diastereomer was isolated in pure form. Thus, inventive compounds and pharmaceutical compositions thereof may be in the form of an individual enantiomer, diastereomer or geometric isomer, or may be in the form of a mixture of stereoisomers. In certain embodiments, the compounds of the invention are enantiopure compounds. In certain other embodiments, mixtures of stereoisomers or diastereomers are provided.

Furthermore, certain compounds, as described herein may have one or more double bonds that can exist as either the Z or E isomer, unless otherwise indicated. The invention additionally encompasses the compounds as individual isomers substantially free of other isomers and alternatively, as mixtures of various isomers, e.g., racemic mixtures of stereoisomers. The invention also encompasses tautomers of specific compounds as described above. In addition to the above-mentioned compounds per se, this invention also encompasses pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives of these compounds and compositions comprising one or more compounds of the invention and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or additives.

Compounds of the invention may be prepared by crystallization of compound of formula (I) under different conditions and may exist as one or a combination of polymorphs of compound of general formula (I) forming part of this invention. For example, different polymorphs may be identified and/or prepared using different solvents, or different mixtures of solvents for recrystallization; by performing crystallizations at different temperatures; or by using various modes of cooling, ranging from very fast to very slow cooling during crystallizations. Polymorphs may also be obtained by heating or melting the compound followed by gradual or fast cooling. The presence of polymorphs may be determined by solid probe NMR spectroscopy, IR spectroscopy, differential scanning calorimetry, powder X-ray diffractogram and/or other techniques. Thus, the present invention encompasses inventive compounds, their derivatives, their tautomeric forms, their stereoisomers, their polymorphs, their pharmaceutically acceptable salts their pharmaceutically acceptable solvates and pharmaceutically acceptable compositions containing them.

2) Compounds and Definitions

As discussed above, this invention provides novel compounds with a range of biological properties. Compounds of this invention have biological activities relevant for the treatment of diseases or other disorders such as proliferative diseases, including, but not limited to cancer. In certain other embodiments, the inventive compounds also find use in the prevention of restenosis of blood vessels subject to traumas such as angioplasty and stenting.

Compounds of this invention include those specifically set forth above and described herein, and are illustrated in part by the various classes, subgenera and species disclosed elsewhere herein.

Additionally, the present invention provides pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives of the inventive compounds, and methods of treating a subject using these compounds, pharmaceutical compositions thereof, or either of these in combination with one or more additional therapeutic agents. The phrase, “pharmaceutically acceptable derivative”, as used herein, denotes any pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or salt of such ester, of such compound, or any other adduct or derivative which, upon administration to a patient, is capable of providing (directly or indirectly) a compound as otherwise described herein, or a metabolite or residue thereof. Pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thus include among others pro-drugs. A pro-drug is a derivative of a compound, usually with significantly reduced pharmacological activity, which contains an additional moiety which is susceptible to removal in vivo yielding the parent molecule as the pharmacologically active species. An example of a pro-drug is an ester which is cleaved in vivo to yield a compound of interest. Pro-drugs of a variety of compounds, and materials and methods for derivatizing the parent compounds to create the pro-drugs, are known and may be adapted to the present invention. Certain exemplary pharmaceutical compositions and pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives will be discussed in more detail herein below.

Numerous suitable prodrug moieties, and information concerning their selection, synthesis and use are well known in the art. Examples of prodrug moieties of interest include, among others, prodrug moieties that can be attached to primary or secondary amine-containing functionalities. Examples of such prodrug moieties include the following:

For the synthesis of the prodrug groups, see Borchardt, R. T. et. al., J. Org. Chem. 1997, 43, 3641-3652. R¹ = all natural, unnatural amino acids

For the synthesis of the prodrug groups, see Zhou, X-X. et. al., PCT WO 99/51613. R¹ = C1-C4 alkyl, cycloalkyl, oxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, etc. R² = all natural, unnatural amino acids

For the synthesis of the prodrug groups, see Ezra, A. et. al., J. Med. Chem. 2000, 43, 3641-3652. R¹, R² = all natural, unnatural amino acids Other examples of prodrug moieties of interest include prodrug moieties that can be attached to hydroxyl-containing functionalities. Such prodrug moieties a well-known in the art, and will be readily identified by a person skilled in the relevant art. The present invention encompasses any prodrug form of the compounds described herein.

Certain compounds of the present invention, and definitions of specific functional groups are also described in more detail below. For purposes of this invention, the chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 75^(th) Ed., inside cover, and specific functional groups are generally defined as described therein. Additionally, general principles of organic chemistry, as well as specific functional moieties and reactivity, are described in “Organic Chemistry”, Thomas Sorrell, University Science Books, Sausalito: 1999, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. Furthermore, it will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art that the synthetic methods, as described herein, utilize a variety of protecting groups. By the term “protecting group”, as used herein, it is meant that a particular functional moiety, e.g., O, S, or N, is temporarily blocked so that a reaction can be carried out selectively at another reactive site in a multifunctional compound. In preferred embodiments, a protecting group reacts selectively in good yield to give a protected substrate that is stable to the projected reactions; the protecting group must be selectively removed in good yield by readily available, preferably nontoxic reagents that do not attack the other functional groups; the protecting group forms an easily separable derivative (more preferably without the generation of new stereogenic centers); and the protecting group has a minimum of additional functionality to avoid further sites of reaction. As detailed herein, oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen and carbon protecting groups may be utilized. For example, in certain embodiments, as detailed herein, certain exemplary oxygen protecting groups are utilized. These oxygen protecting groups include, but are not limited to methyl ethers, substituted methyl ethers (e.g., MOM (methoxymethyl ether), MTM (methylthiomethyl ether), BOM (benzyloxymethyl ether), PMBM (p-methoxybenzyloxymethyl ether), to name a few), substituted ethyl ethers, substituted benzyl ethers, silyl ethers (e.g., TMS (trimethylsilyl ether), TES (triethylsilylether), TIPS (triisopropylsilyl ether), TBDMS (t-butyldimethylsilyl ether), tribenzyl silyl ether, TBDPS (t-butyldiphenyl silyl ether), to name a few), esters (e.g., formate, acetate, benzoate (Bz), trifluoroacetate, dichloroacetate, to name a few), carbonates, cyclic acetals and ketals. In certain other exemplary embodiments, nitrogen protecting groups are utilized. These nitrogen protecting groups include, but are not limited to, carbamates (including methyl, ethyl and substituted ethyl carbamates (e.g., Troc), to name a few) amides, cyclic imide derivatives, N-Alkyl and N-Aryl amines, imine derivatives, and enamine derivatives, to name a few. Certain other exemplary protecting groups are detailed herein, however, it will be appreciated that the present invention is not intended to be limited to these protecting groups; rather, a variety of additional equivalent protecting groups can be readily identified using the above criteria and utilized in the present invention. Additionally, a variety of protecting groups are described in “Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis” Third Ed. Greene, T. W. and Wuts, P. G., Eds., John Wiley & Sons, New York: 1999, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.

It will be appreciated that the compounds, as described herein, may be substituted with any number of substituents or functional moieties. In general, the term “substituted” whether preceded by the term “optionally” or not, and substituents contained in formulas of this invention, refer to the replacement of hydrogen radicals in a given structure with the radical of a specified substituent. When more than one position in any given structure may be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent may be either the same or different at every position. As used herein, the term “substituted” is contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds. In a broad aspect, the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, aromatic and nonaromatic substituents of organic compounds. For purposes of this invention, heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valencies of the heteroatoms. Furthermore, this invention is not intended to be limited in any manner by the permissible substituents of organic compounds. Combinations of substituents and variables envisioned by this invention are preferably those that result in the formation of stable compounds useful in the treatment, for example of cancer. The term “stable”, as used herein, preferably refers to compounds which possess stability sufficient to allow manufacture and which maintain the integrity of the compound for a sufficient period of time to be detected and preferably for a sufficient period of time to be useful for the purposes detailed herein.

The term “aliphatic”, as used herein, includes both saturated and unsaturated, straight chain (i.e., unbranched) or branched aliphatic hydrocarbons, which are optionally substituted with one or more functional groups. As will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art, “aliphatic” is intended herein to include, but is not limited to, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl moieties. Thus, as used herein, the term “alkyl” includes straight and branched alkyl groups. An analogous convention applies to other generic terms such as “alkenyl”, “alkynyl” and the like. Furthermore, as used herein, the terms “alkyl”, “alkenyl”, “alkynyl” and the like encompass both substituted and unsubstituted groups. In certain embodiments, as used herein, “lower alkyl” is used to indicate those alkyl groups (cyclic, acyclic, substituted, unsubstituted, branched or unbranched) having 1-6 carbon atoms.

In certain embodiments, the alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl groups employed in the invention contain 1-20 aliphatic carbon atoms. In certain other embodiments, the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups employed in the invention contain 1-10 aliphatic carbon atoms. In yet other embodiments, the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups employed in the invention contain 1-8 aliphatic carbon atoms. In still other embodiments, the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups employed in the invention contain 1-6 aliphatic carbon atoms. In yet other embodiments, the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups employed in the invention contain 1-4 carbon atoms. Illustrative aliphatic groups thus include, but are not limited to, for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, allyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, sec-pentyl, isopentyl, tert-pentyl, n-hexyl, sec-hexyl, moieties and the like, which again, may bear one or more substituents. Alkenyl groups include, but are not limited to, for example, ethenyl, propenyl, butenyl, 1-methyl-2-buten-1-yl, and the like. Representative alkynyl groups include, but are not limited to, ethynyl, 2-propynyl (propargyl), 1-propynyl and the like.

The term “alicyclic”, as used herein, refers to compounds which combine the properties of aliphatic and cyclic compounds and include but are not limited to cyclic, or polycyclic aliphatic hydrocarbons and bridged cycloalkyl compounds, which are optionally substituted with one or more functional groups. As will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art, “alicyclic” is intended herein to include, but is not limited to, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, and cycloalkynyl moieties, which are optionally substituted with one or more functional groups. Illustrative alicyclic groups thus include, but are not limited to, for example, cyclopropyl, —CH₂-cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, —CH₂-cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, —CH₂-cyclopentyl-n, cyclohexyl, —CH₂-cyclohexyl, cyclohexenylethyl, cyclohexanylethyl, norborbyl moieties and the like, which again, may bear one or more substituents.

The term “alkoxy” (or “alkyloxy”), or “thioalkyl” as used herein refers to an alkyl group, as previously defined, attached to the parent molecular moiety through an oxygen atom or through a sulfur atom. In certain embodiments, the alkyl group contains 1-20 aliphatic carbon atoms. In certain other embodiments, the alkyl group contains 1-10 aliphatic carbon atoms. In yet other embodiments, the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups employed in the invention contain 1-8 aliphatic carbon atoms. In still other embodiments, the alkyl group contains 1-6 aliphatic carbon atoms. In yet other embodiments, the alkyl group contains 1-4 aliphatic carbon atoms. Examples of alkoxy, include but are not limited to, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, neopentoxy and n-hexoxy. Examples of thioalkyl include, but are not limited to, methylthio, ethylthio, propylthio, isopropylthio, n-butylthio, and the like.

The term “alkylamino” refers to a group having the structure —NHR′ wherein R′ is alkyl, as defined herein. The term “aminoalkyl” refers to a group having the structure NH₂R′—, wherein R′ is alkyl, as defined herein. In certain embodiments, the alkyl group contains 1-20 aliphatic carbon atoms. In certain other embodiments, the alkyl group contains 1-10 aliphatic carbon atoms. In yet other embodiments, the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups employed in the invention contain 1-8 aliphatic carbon atoms. In still other embodiments, the alkyl group contains 1-6 aliphatic carbon atoms. In yet other embodiments, the alkyl group contains 1-4 aliphatic carbon atoms. Examples of alkylamino include, but are not limited to, methylamino, ethylamino, iso-propylamino and the like.

Some examples of sutstituents of the above-described aliphatic (and other) moieties of compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to aliphatic; alicyclic; heteroaliphatic; heteroalicyclic; aryl; heteroaryl; alkylaryl; alkylheteroaryl; alkoxy; aryloxy; heteroalkoxy; heteroaryloxy; alkylthio; arylthio; heteroalkylthio; heteroarylthio; F; Cl; Br; I; —OH; —NO₂; —CN; —CF₃; —CH₂CF₃; —CH1₂; —CH₂OH; —CH₂CH₂OH; —CH₂NH₂; —CH₂SO₂CH₃; —C(O)R_(x); —CO₂(R_(x)); —CON(R_(x))₂; —OC(O)R_(x); —OCO₂R_(x); —OCON(R_(x))₂; —N(R_(x))₂; —S(O)₂R_(x); —NR_(x)(CO)R_(x) wherein each occurrence of R_(x) independently includes, but is not limited to, aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylaryl, or alkylheteroaryl, wherein any of the aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylaryl, or alkylheteroaryl, substituents described above and herein may be substituted or unsubstituted, branched or unbranched, cyclic or acyclic, and wherein any of the aryl or heteroaryl substituents described above and herein may be substituted or unsubstituted. Additional examples of generally applicable substituents are illustrated by the specific embodiments shown in the Examples that are described herein.

In general, the terms “aryl” and “heteroaryl”, as used herein, refer to stable mono- or polycyclic, heterocyclic, polycyclic, and polyheterocyclic unsaturated moieties having preferably 3-14 carbon atoms, each of which may be substituted or unsubstituted. It will also be appreciated that aryl and heteroaryl moieties, as defined herein may be attached via an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, alkyl or heteroalkyl moiety and thus also include -(aliphatic)aryl, -(heteroaliphatic)aryl, -(aliphatic)heteroaryl, -(heteroaliphatic)heteroaryl, -(alkyl)aryl, -(heteroalkyl)aryl, -(heteroalkyl)aryl, and -(heteroalkyl)heteroaryl moieties. Thus, as used herein, the phrases “aryl or heteroaryl” and “aryl, heteroaryl, -(aliphatic)aryl, -(heteroaliphatic)aryl, -(aliphatic)heteroaryl, -(heteroaliphatic)heteroaryl, -(alkyl)aryl, -(heteroalkyl)aryl, -(heteroalkyl)aryl, and heteroalkyl)heteroaryl” are interchangeable. Substituents include, but are not limited to, any of the previously mentioned substitutents, i.e., the substituents recited for aliphatic moieties, or for other moieties as disclosed herein, resulting in the formation of a stable compound. In certain embodiments of the present invention, “aryl” refers to a mono- or bicyclic carbocyclic ring system having one or two aromatic rings including, but not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indanyl, indenyl and the like. In certain embodiements of the present invention, the term “heteroaryl”, as used herein, refers to a cyclic aromatic radical having from five to ten ring atoms of which one ring atom is selected from S, O and N; zero, one or two ring atoms are additional heteroatoms independently selected from S, O and N; and the remaining ring atoms are carbon, the radical being joined to the rest of the molecule via any of the ring atoms, such as, for example, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isooxazolyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiophenyl, furanyl, quilnolinyl, isoquinolinyl, and the like.

It will be appreciated that aryl and heteroaryl groups (including bycyclic aryl groups) can be unsubstituted or substituted, wherein substitution includes replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon independently with any one or more of the following moieties including, but not limited to: aliphatic; alicyclic; heteroaliphatic; heteroalicyclic; aryl; heteroaryl; alkylaryl; alkylheteroaryl; alkoxy; aryloxy; heteroalkoxy; heteroaryloxy; alkylthio; arylthio; heteroalkylthio; heteroarylthio; F; Cl; Br; I; —OH; —NO₂; —CN; —CF₃; —CH₂CF₃; —CHCl₂; —CH₂OH; —CH₂CH₂OH; —CH₂NH₂; —CH₂SO₂CH₃; —C(O)R_(x); —CO₂(R_(x)); —CON(R)₂; —OC(O)R_(x); —OCO₂R_(x); —OCON(R_(x))₂; —N(R_(x))₂; —S(O)₂R_(x); —NR_(x)(CO)R_(x) wherein each occurrence of R_(x) independently includes, but is not limited to, aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylaryl, or alkylheteroaryl, wherein any of the aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylaryl, or alkylheteroaryl, substituents described above and herein may be substituted or unsubstituted, branched or unbranched, cyclic or acyclic, and wherein any of the aryl or heteroaryl substituents described above and herein may be substituted or unsubstituted. Additional examples of generally applicable substituents are illustrated by the specific embodiments shown in the Examples that are described herein.

The term “cycloalkyl”, as used herein, refers specifically to groups having three to seven, preferably three to ten carbon atoms. Suitable cycloalkyls include, but are not limited to cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl and the like, which, as in the case of other aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or hetercyclic moieties, may optionally be substituted with substituents including, but not limited to aliphatic; alicyclic; heteroaliphatic; heteroalicyclic; aryl; heteroaryl; alkylaryl; alkyheteroaryl; alkoxy; aryloxy; heteroalkoxy; heteroaryloxy; alkylthio; arylthio; heteroalkylthio; heteroarylthio; F; Cl; Br; I; —OH; —NO₂; —CN; —CF₃; —CH₂CF₃; —CHCl₂; —CH₂OH; —CH₂CH₂OH; —CH₂NH₂; —CH₂SO₂CH₃; —C(O)R_(x); —CO₂(R_(x)); —CON(R_(x))₂; —OC(O)R_(x); —OCO₂R_(x); —OCON(R_(x))₂; —N(R_(x))₂; —S(O)₂R_(x); —NR_(x)(CO)R_(x) wherein each occurrence of R_(x) independently includes, but is not limited to, aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylaryl, or alkylheteroaryl, wherein any of the aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylaryl, or alkylheteroaryl, substituents described above and herein may be substituted or unsubstituted, branched or unbranched, cyclic or acyclic, and wherein any of the aryl or heteroaryl substituents described above and herein may be substituted or unsubstituted. Additional examples of generally applicable substituents are illustrated by the specific embodiments shown in the Examples that are described herein.

The term “heteroaliphatic”, as used herein, refers to aliphatic moieties in which one or more carbon atoms in the main chain have have substituted with an heteroatom. Thus, a heteroaliphatic group refers to an aliphatic chain which contains one or more oxygen sulfur, nitrogen, phosphorus or silicon atoms, e.g., in place of carbon atoms. Heteroaliphatic moieties may be branched or linear unbranched. In certain embodiments, heteroaliphatic moieties are substituted by independent replacement of one or more of the hydrogen atoms thereon with one or more moieties including, but not limited to aliphatic; alicyclic; heteroaliphatic; heteroalicyclic; aryl; heteroaryl; alkylaryl; alkylheteroaryl; alkoxy; aryloxy; heteroalkoxy; heteroaryloxy; alkylthio; arylthio; heteroalkylthio; heteroarylthio; F; Cl; Br; I; —OH; —NO₂; —CN; —CF₃; —CH₂CF₃; —CHCl₂; —CH₂OH; —CH₂CH₂OH; —CH₂NH₂; —CH₂SO₂CH₃; —C(O)R_(x); —CO₂(R_(x)); —CON(R_(x))₂; —OC(O)R_(x); —OCO₂R_(x); —OCON(R_(x))₂; —N(R_(x))₂; —S(O)₂R_(x); —NR_(x)(CO)R_(x) wherein each occurrence of R_(x) independently includes, but is not limited to, aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylaryl, or alkylheteroaryl, wherein any of the aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, alkylaryl, or alkylheteroaryl substituents described above and herein may be substituted or unsubstituted, branched or unbranched, cyclic or acyclic, and wherein any of the aryl or heteroaryl substituents described above and herein may be substituted or unsubstituted. Additional examples of generally applicable substituents are illustrated by the specific embodiments shown in the Examples that are described herein.

The term “heteroalicyclic”, as used herein, refers to compounds which combine the properties of heteroaliphatic and cyclic compounds and include but are not limited to saturated and unsaturated mono- or polycyclic heterocycles such as morpholino, pyrrolidinyl, furanyl, thiofuranyl, pyrrolyl etc., which are optionally substituted with one or more functional groups.

The terms “halo” and “halogen” as used herein refer to an atom selected from fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine.

The term “haloalkyl” denotes an alkyl group, as defined above, having one, two, or three halogen atoms attached thereto and is exemplified by such groups as chloromethyl, bromoethyl, trifluoromethyl, and the like.

The term “heterocycloalkyl” or “heterocycle”, as used herein, refers to a non-aromatic 5-, 6- or 7-membered ring or a polycyclic group, including, but not limited to a bi- or tri-cyclic group comprising fused six-membered rings having between one and three heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen, wherein (i) each 5-membered ring has 0 to 1 double bonds and each 6-membered ring has 0 to 2 double bonds, (ii) the nitrogen and sulfur heteroatoms may be optionally be oxidized, (iii) the nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be quaternized, and (iv) any of the above heterocyclic rings may be fused to an aryl or heteroaryl ring. Representative heterocycles include, but are not limited to, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, morpholinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, and tetrahydrofuryl. In certain embodiments, a “substituted heterocycloalkyl or heterocycle” group is utilized and as used herein, refers to a heterocycloalkyl or heterocycle group, as defined above, substituted by the independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with but are not limited to aliphatic; alicyclic; heteroaliphatic; heteroalicyclic; aryl; heteroaryl; alkylaryl; alkylheteroaryl; alkoxy; aryloxy; heteroalkoxy; heteroaryloxy; alkylthio; arylthio; heteroalkylthio; heteroarylthio; F; Cl; Br; I; —OH; —NO₂; —CN; —CF₃; —CH₂CF₃; —CHCl₂; —CH₂OH; —CH₂CH₂OH; —CH₂NH₂; —CH₂SO₂CH₃; —C(O)R; —CO₂(R_(x)); —CON(R_(x))₂; —OC(O)R_(x); —OCO₂R_(x); —OCON(R_(x))₂; —N(R_(x))₂; —S(O)₂R_(x); —NR_(x)(CO)R_(x) wherein each occurrence of R_(x) independently includes, but is not limited to, aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylaryl, or alkylheteroaryl, wherein any of the aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl, heteroaryl, alkylaryl, or alkylheteroaryl, substituents described above and herein may be substituted or unsubstituted, branched or unbranched, cyclic or acyclic, and wherein any of the aryl or heteroaryl substitutents described above and herein may be substituted or unsubstituted. Additional examples or generally applicable substituents are illustrated by the specific embodiments shown in the Examples, which are described herein.

As used herein, the terms “aliphatic”, “heteroaliphatic”, “alkyl”, “alkenyl”, “alkynyl”, “heteroalkyl”, “heteroalkenyl”, “heteroalkynyl”, and the like encompass substituted and unsubstituted, saturated and unsaturated, and linear and branched groups. Similarly, the terms “alicyclic”, “heteroalicyclic”, “heterocycloalkyl”, “heterocycle”, and the like encompass substituted and unsubstituted, and saturated and unsaturated groups. In addition, the terms “aliphatic(aryl)”, “heteroaliphatic(aryl)”, “aliphatic(heteroaryl)”, “heteroaliphatic(heteroaryl)”, “alicyclic(aryl)”, “heteroalicyclic(aryl)”, “alicyclic(heteroaryl)”, “heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl)”, “-alkyl(aryl)”, “heteroalkyl(aryl)”, “-alkyl(heteroaryl)”, “heteroalkyl(heteroaryl)”, and the like encompass substituted and unsubstituted, and saturated and unsaturated (i.e., non-aromatic portion of the moiety) groups. Additionally, the terms “cycloalkyl”, “cycloalkenyl”, “cycloalkynyl”, “heterocycloalkyl”, “heterocycloalkenyl”, “heterocycloalkynyl”, “aryl”, “heteroaryl” and the like encompass both substituted and unsubstituted groups, unless otherwise indicated.

3) Synthetic Methodology

According to the present invention, any available techniques can be used to make or prepare the inventive compounds or compositions including them. For example, a variety of solution phase synthetic methods such as those discussed in detail below may be used. Alternatively or additionally, the inventive compounds may be prepared using any of a variety combinatorial techniques, parallel synthesis and/or solid phase synthetic methods known in the art.

In one aspect, the present invention provides novel peptides having formula (I) as described above and in certain classes and subclasses herein. Examples of synthetic methods for preparing exemplary types of compounds of the invention are provided below, as detailed in Schemes 1-12, and in the Exemplification herein. It will be appreciated that the methods as described herein can be applied to each of the compounds as disclosed herein and equivalents thereof. Additionally, the reagents and starting materials are well known to those skilled in the art. Although the following schemes describe certain exemplary compounds, it will be appreciated that the use of alternate starting materials will yield other analogs of the invention. For example, compounds are described below where X₁ and X₂ are each C═O, R₅ is hydrogen, R₆ is tert-butyl and R₇ is methyl; however, it will be appreciated that alternate starting materials and/or intermediates can be utilized to generate compounds where, for example, X₁ and X₂ may be independently C═O, CH₂, SO₂, and R₅-R₇ may represent moieties other than those depicted herein, such as alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, etc. It will also be appreciated that any available techniques known in the art can be used to make the inventive compounds or compositions including them. A person of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that suitable synthetic methods are not limited to those depicted in Schemes 1-12 below, and that any suitable synthetic methods known in the art can be used to prepare the inventive compounds.

In certain embodiments, the inventive compounds, have the general structure (I′) as shown in Scheme 1, where R, R′ and Q are aliphatic, heteroaliphatic, aryl or heteroaryl moieties. In preferred embodiments, R, R′ and Q are moieties such as those described in classes and subclasses herein. Examples of preferred structures for R, R′ and Q are depicted in Scheme 1.

In certain embodiments, the inventive compounds belong to class (Ia) and subclasses thereof, as described herein. Scheme 2 depicts the synthesis of exemplary compounds of this class (compounds of general structure 11). As shown in Scheme 2, the dipeptide core can be constructed, for example, from N-Boc-N-methyl-valinal (2) and N-Boc-tert-leucine (4). The N-terminal moiety of the compounds of the invention (R′ in Scheme 1) may be provided by (S)—N-Boc-neo-phenylalanine (6). As depicted in Scheme 2, a variety of synthetic methods allow access to a variety of analogs, for example, carboxylic esters of general structure 7, carboxylic acid 8 or amides of general structure 11. The reader will appreciate that other synthetic methods known in the art can be used to prepare other derivatives.

An exemplary synthetic approach for the preparation of intermediate 6 is depicted in Scheme 3. The method afforded (S)—N-Boc-neo-phenylalanine (6) in 20% overall yield.

In certain other embodiments, the inventive compounds belong to class (Ib) and subclasses thereof, as described herein. Schemes 4-6 depict the synthesis of exemplary types of compounds of this class (for example, Amine Esters, Amine Acids, Amine Amides and N-Acetyl Amine Amides of general structure 18, 20, 23, respectively as seen in Schemes 4; See also Amine Esters, Amine Acids, Amine Amides and N-Acetyl Amine Amides of general structure 25, 26 and 27, respectively in Scheme 5). In certain embodiments, R may be a nitrogen-containing heteroalkyl moiety (see Schemes 4 and 5) or an unsaturated oxygen-containing heteroalkyl moiety (see Scheme 6). Although Schemes 4-6 depict compounds comprising an N-terminal moiety derived from (S)—N-Boc-neo-phenylalanine (6), a person of ordinary skill in the art would appreciate that a wide variety of organic moieties other than those described in Schemes 4-6 may be used to construct the compounds of the invention. Similarly, Schemes 4-6 recite compounds where the C-terminal moiety may be carboxylic esters, carboxylic acids or amides. It is to be understood that the scope of the invention is not limited to these compounds, but rather encompasses derivatives and analogs of these compounds, or compounds obtained from different starting materials.

In certain other embodiments, the inventive compounds belong to class (Ic) and subclasses thereof, as described herein. Schemes 7-10 depict the synthesis of exemplary types of compounds of this class (for example Amine Esters, Amine Acids and Amine Amides of general structure 42, 43 and 45, respectively, as seen in Scheme 7). In certain embodiments, the compounds of the invention comprise a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic N-terminal moiety. For example, the heterocyclic moiety may be a piperidine ring (Schemes 7, 8 and 9) or a thiazolidine ring (Scheme 10). Examples of other suitable moieties are described in the Examplification herein, or will be apparent to the person of ordinary skill in the art. As discussed above, R may be a nitrogen-containing heteroalkyl moiety (Scheme 7) or an unsaturated alkyl moiety (Schemes 8, 9 and 10).

Methylpipecolic Acid Analogs

In certain other embodiments, the inventive compounds belong to class (Id) and subclasses thereof, as described herein. One skilled in the art would appreciate that the exemplary heterocyclic starting materials described in Schemes 7-10, that are used in the preparation of compounds of class (Ic) (namely compounds 38, 60 or 65) could be substituted for acyclic α-amino acid moieties to access compounds of class (Id), as illustrated in Scheme 11 below:

For example, reaction of diethylglycine (72) with amine HCl salt 49 gives the N-terminal gem-diethyl ethyl ester 73, or the corresponding carboxylic acid 74, after hydrolysis under suitable conditions (Scheme 12).

It will be appreciated that each of the reactions described in Schemes 2-12 above can be carried out using reagents and conditions as described for the synthesis of various types of exemplary compounds described above, or they may be modified using other available reagents or starting materials. For example, a variety of amide formation conditions, esterification, hydrolysis and aromatic nucleus functionalization conditions are well-known in the art and can be utilized in the method of the invention. See generally, March, Advanced Organic Chemistry, 5^(th) ed., John Wiley & Sons, 2001; and “Comprehensive Organic Transformations, a guide to functional group preparations”, Richard C. Larock, VCH publishers, 1999; the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

As mentioned above, it will be appreciated that the invention is not limited in scope to the compounds recited herein. Synthetic strategies or starting materials other than those described herein may be used to prepare compounds of general structure (I). It will also be appreciated that each of the components/starting materials used in the synthesis of the compounds of the invention can be diversified either before synthesis or alternatively after the construction of the peptide construct. As used herein, the term “diversifying” or “diversify” means reacting an inventive compound, as defined herein, at one or more reactive sites to modify a functional moiety or to add a functional moiety. For example, where an aromatic ring is present in the compound, the aromatic ring can be diversified (prior to or after reaction) to either add functionality (e.g., where hydrogen is present, a halogen or other functionality can be added) or to modify functionality (e.g., where a hydroxyl group is present on the aromatic ring, the aromatic ring can be diversified by reacting with a reagent to protect the hydroxyl group, or to convert it into an aliphatic or heteroaliphatic moiety). Described generally below are a variety of schemes to assist the reader in the synthesis of a variety of analogues, either by diversification of the intermediate components or by diversification of the peptide construct.

In certain embodiments, the preparation of chemically diverse derivatives may be achieved by diversifying the C-terminal moiety of the compounds. For example, where the C-terminal moiety is a carboxylic acid, examples of chemical transformations suitable to achieve such derivatization include, but are not limited to, reduction to the corresponding aldehyde or alcohol, amidation, Wittig reaction, decarboxylation, esterification, addition of nucleophiles, conversion to ketones, imines, hydrazones, azides, etc . . . Examples of such transformations are depicted in Schemes 12 and 13. One skilled in the art will recognize that possible chemical transformations suitable to achieve diversification of the compounds of the invention are not limited to those depicted in Schemes 1-13. Rather, any suitable synthetic methods known in the art can be used to achieve desired chemical transformations.

4) Research Uses, Formulation and Administration

According to the present invention, the inventive compounds may be assayed in any of the available assays known in the art for identifying compounds having a pre-determined biological activity. For example, the assay may be cellular or non-cellular, in vivo or in vitro, high- or low-throughput format, etc. In certain exemplary embodiments, the inventive compounds are tested in assays to identify those compounds having cytotoxic or growth inhibitory effect in vitro, or cause tumor regression and/or inhibition of tumor growth in vivo.

Compounds of this invention which are of particular interest include those which:

-   -   exhibit cytotoxic and/or growth inhibitory effect on cancer cell         lines maintained in vitro or in animal studies using a         scientifically acceptable cancer cell xenograft model;     -   preferably cause tumor regression in vivo;     -   exhibit low sensitivity to MDR;     -   exhibit low cytotoxicity to non-dividing normal cells; and/or     -   exhibit a favorable therapeutic profile (e.g., safety, efficacy,         and stability).

As detailed in the exemplification herein, in assays to determine the ability of compounds to inhibit the growth of tumor cell lines in vitro, certain inventive compounds exhibited IC₅₀ values 10 μM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 5 μM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 1 μM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 750 nM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 500 nM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 250 nM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 100 nM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 50 nM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 25 nM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 10 nM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 7.5 nM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 5 nM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 2.5 nM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 1 nM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 0.75 nM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 0.5 nM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 0.25 nM. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit IC₅₀ values 0.1 nM. In certain embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit growth inhibition IC₅₀ values in cultured human cancer cells in the range of 0.1 nM-10 nM.

In certain other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit low sensitivity to MDR. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention have a ratio [cell growth inhibition in MDR-positive cells]/[cell growth inhibition in MDR-negative cells] (i.e., resistance ratio) 10. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention have a resistance ratio 9. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention have a resistance ratio 8. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention have a resistance ratio 7. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention have a resistance ratio 6. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention have a resistance ratio 5. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention have a resistance ratio 4.

In certain other embodiments, compounds of the invention exhibit low cytotoxicity to non-dividing normal cells. In certain exemplary embodiments, inventive compounds exhibit little or no cytotoxicity in non-dividing normal cells at concentrations 1000 fold the concentration at which they inhibit cancer cell growth. In certain exemplary embodiments, inventive compounds exhibit little or no cytotoxicity in non-dividing normal cells at concentrations in the range of up to 1-10 μM.

In certain embodiments, inventive compounds exhibit stability in mouse serum.

In certain embodiments, inventive compounds exhibit a low mitotic block reversibility ratio. In certain embodiments, inventive compounds exhibit mitotic block reversibility ratios of 1 to about 30. In certain embodiments, inventive compounds exhibit mitotic block reversibility ratios of 1 to about 25. In certain embodiments, inventive compounds exhibit mitotic block reversibility ratios of 1 to about 20. In certain embodiments, inventive compounds exhibit mitotic block reversibility ratios of 1 to about 15. In certain embodiments, inventive compounds exhibit mitotic block reversibility ratios of 1 to about 10. In certain embodiments, inventive compounds exhibit mitotic block reversibility ratios of 1 to about 5. In certain embodiments, inventive compounds exhibit mitotic block reversibility ratios of 1 to about 3.

In certain embodiments, compounds of the invention cause tumor regression in vivo. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention cause tumor regression in vivo in suitable mouse tumor xenograph models. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention cause reduction of tumor size to below 70% of the size at the start of compound administration in a suitable cancer cell xenograft model. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention cause reduction of tumor size to below 65% of the size at the start of compound administration in a suitable cancer cell xenograft model. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention cause reduction of tumor size to below 60% of the size at the start of compound administration in a suitable cancer cell xenograft model. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention cause reduction of tumor size to below 55% of the size at the start of compound administration in a suitable cancer cell xenograft model. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention cause reduction of tumor size to below 50% of the size at the start of compound administration in a suitable cancer cell xenograft model. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention cause tumor regression in certain multidrug resistant xenograph models.

In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention cause inhibition of tumor growth in vivo. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention cause significant inhibition of tumor growth in suitable cancer cell xenograft models. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention cause significant inhibition of tumor growth in suitable multidrug resistant cancer cell xenograft models. In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention cause inhibition of tumor growth in treated animals by >50% compared to that of control aninals (i.e., “treated” tumor size <50% “control” tumor size; or T/C value <50%) in suitable cancer cell xenograft models. In certain embodiments, compounds of the invention have T/C values <70%. In certain embodiments, compounds of the invention have T/C values <65%. In certain embodiments, compounds of the invention have T/C values <60%. In certain embodiments, compounds of the invention have T/C values <55%.

In certain embodiments, compounds of the invention inhibit the growth of human cancer cells in vitro, exhibit low sensitivity to MDR (e.g., low resistance ratio), exhibit low cytotoxicity to non-dividing normal cells, exhibit stability in mouse serum, have a low mitotic block reversibility ratio, cause tumor regression in vivo, and/or cause inhibition of tumor growth in vivo.

In certain embodiments, compounds of the invention inhibit the growth of human cancer cells in vitro, exhibit low sensitivity to MDR (e.g., low resistance ratio), exhibit low cytotoxicity to non-dividing normal cells, exhibit stability in mouse serum, have a low mitotic block reversibility ratio, cause tumor regression in vivo, and cause inhibition of tumor growth in vivo.

In certain embodiments, compounds of the invention have any one or more of the following properties:

-   -   (i) exhibit growth inhibition IC₅₀ values in cultured human         cancer cells in the range of 0.1 nM-10 nM;     -   (ii) have a resistance ratio preferably 10, preferably 9,         preferably S, preferably 7, preferably 6, preferably 5, more         preferably 4;     -   (iii) exhibit little or no cytotoxicity in non-dividing normal         cells at concentrations in the range of up to 1-10 μM;     -   (iv) exhibit stability in mouse serum;     -   (v) exhibit mitotic block reversibility ratios of 1 to about 30,         preferably of 1 to about 25, preferably of 1 to about 20,         preferably of 1 to about 15, preferably of 1 to about 10,         preferably of 1 to about 5, most preferably of about 1 to about         3;     -   (vi) cause reduction of tumor size to below 70%, preferably         below 65%, preferably below 60%, preferably below 55%, most         preferably below 50%, of the size at the start of compound         administration in suitable cancer cell xenograft models; and/or     -   (vii) cause significant inhibition of tumor growth in suitable         cancer cell xenograft model (e.g., T/C value preferably <70%,         preferably <65%, preferably <60%, preferably <55%, most         preferably <50%).

In certain embodiments, compounds of the invention have the following properties:

-   -   (i) exhibit growth inhibition IC₅₀ values in cultured human         cancer cells in the range of 0.1 nM-10 nM;     -   (ii) have a resistance ratio preferably 10, preferably 9,         preferably 8, preferably 7, preferably 6, preferably 5, more         preferably 4;     -   (iii) exhibit little or no cytotoxicity in non-dividing normal         cells at concentrations in the range of up to 1-10 μM;     -   (iv) exhibit stability in mouse serum;     -   (v) exhibit mitotic block reversibility ratios of 1 to about 30,         preferably of 1 to about 25, preferably of 1 to about 20,         preferably of 1 to about 15, preferably of 1 to about 10,         preferably of 1 to about 5, most preferably of about 1 to about         3;     -   (vi) cause reduction of tumor size to below 70%, preferably         below 65%, preferably below 60%, preferably below 55%, most         preferably below 50%, of the size at the start of compound         administration in suitable cancer cell xenograft models; and     -   (vii) cause significant inhibition of tumor growth in suitable         cancer cell xenograft model (e.g., T/C value preferably <70%,         preferably <65%, preferably <60%, preferably <55%, most         preferably <50%).

Examples of compounds exhibiting desired properties include ER-805913, ER-805736, ER-807102, ER-807328, ER-806925, ER-807850, ER-807904, ER-807974, ER-808368, ER-808662, ER-808824, and salts thereof (See Table below).

As discussed above, compounds of the invention exhibit activity for the inhibition of tumor cell growth. As such, the inventive compounds as useful for the treatment of a variety of disorders, including, but not limited to, glioblastoma, retinoblastoma, breast cancer, cervical cancer, colon and rectal cancer, leukemia, lung cancer (including, but not limited to small cell lung cancer), melanoma, multiple myeloma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, ovarian cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer and gastric cancer, to name a few. In certain embodiments, the inventive compounds are useful for the treatment of solid and non-solid tumors. In still other embodiments of interest, the inventive compounds are particularly useful for the treatment of breast cancer, prostate cancer, colon cancer, lung cancer, leukemia and lymphoma.

In certain embodiment, the method involves the administration of a therapeutically effective amount of the compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof to a subject (including, but not limited to a human or animal) in need of it. In certain embodiments, the inventive compounds as useful for the treatment of cancer (including, but not limited to, glioblastoma, retinoblastoma, breast cancer, cervical cancer, colon and rectal cancer, leukemia, lymphoma, lung cancer (including, but not limited to small cell lung cancer), melanoma and/or skin cancer, multiple myeloma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, ovarian cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer and gastric cancer, bladder cancer, uterine cancer, kidney cancer, testicular cancer, stomach cancer, brain cancer, liver cancer, or esophageal cancer).

Pharmaceutical Compositions

As discussed above this invention provides novel compounds that have biological properties useful for the treatment of cancer. In certain embodiments, certain of the compounds as described herein act as inhibitors of tumor growth and thus are useful in the treatment of cancer and in the inhibition of tumor growth and in the killing of cancer cells. In certain embodiments, the inventive compounds are useful for the treatment of solid tumors or non-solid tumors. In still other embodiments of interest, the inventive compounds are useful for the treatment of glioblastoma, retinoblastoma, breast cancer, cervical cancer, colon and rectal cancer, leukemia, lymphoma, lung cancer (including, but not limited to small cell lung cancer), melanoma, multiple myeloma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, ovarian cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer and gastric cancer, to name a few. The inventive compounds also find use in the prevention of restenosis of blood vessels subject to traumas such as angioplasty and stenting.

Accordingly, in another aspect of the present invention, pharmaceutical compositions are provided, which comprise any one of the compounds described herein (or a prodrug, pharmaceutically acceptable salt or other pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof), and optionally comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the compounds are capable of inhibiting the growth of or killing cancer cells. In certain embodiments, these compositions optionally further comprise one or more additional therapeutic agents. Alternatively, a compound of this invention may be administered to a patient in need thereof in combination with the administration of one or more other therapeutic agents. For example, additional therapeutic agents for conjoint administration or inclusion in a pharmaceutical composition with a compound of this invention may be a cytotoxic agent or anticancer agent approved for the treatment of cancer, as discussed in more detail herein, or it may be any one of a number of agents undergoing approval in the Food and Drug Administration that ultimately obtain approval for the treatment of an immune disorder or cancer. It will also be appreciated that certain of the compounds of present invention can exist in free form for treatment, or where appropriate, as a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof. According to the present invention, a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative includes, but is not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, salts of such esters, or a prodrug or other adduct or derivative of a compound of this invention which upon administration to a patient in need is capable of providing, directly or indirectly, a compound as otherwise described herein, or a metabolite or residue thereof.

As used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to those salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgement, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals with little or no undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of amines, carboxylic acids, and other types of compounds, are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge, et al. describe pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 66: 1-19 (1977), incorporated herein by reference. The salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds of the invention, or separately by reacting a free base or free acid function with a suitable reagent, as described generally below. For example, a free base function can be reacted with a suitable acid. Furthermore, where the compounds of the invention carry an acidic moiety, suitable pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof may, include metal salts such as alkali metal salts, e.g. sodium or potassium salts; and alkaline earth metal salts, e.g. calcium or magnesium salts. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable, nontoxic acid addition salts are salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid or with organic acids such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid or malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange. Other pharmaceutically acceptable salts include adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, gluconate, hernisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, phosphate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, stearate, succinate, sulfate, tartrate, thiocyanate, p-toluenesulfonate, trifluoroacetate, undecanoate, valerate salts, and the like. Representative alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and the like. Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, loweralkyl sulfonate and aryl sulfonate.

Additionally, as used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable ester” refers to esters that hydrolyze in vivo and include those that break down readily in the human body to leave the parent compound or a salt thereof. Suitable ester groups include, for example, those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable aliphatic carboxylic acids, particularly alkanoic, alkenoic, cycloalkanoic and alkanedioic acids, in which each alkyl or alkenyl moeity advantageously has not more than 6 carbon atoms. Examples of particular esters include formates, acetates, propionates, butyrates, acrylates and ethylsuccinates.

Furthermore, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs” as used herein refers to those prodrugs of the compounds of the present invention which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the issues of humans and lower animals with undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response, and the like, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and effective for their intended use, as well as the zwitterionic forms, where possible, of the compounds of the invention. The term “prodrug” refers to compounds that are rapidly transformed in vivo to yield the parent compound of the above formula, for example by hydrolysis in blood. A thorough discussion is provided in T. Higuchi and V. Stella, Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems, Vol. 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series, and in Edward B. Roche, ed., Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987, both of which are incorporated herein by reference.

As described above, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention additionally comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, which, as used herein, includes any and all solvents, diluents, or other liquid vehicle, dispersion or suspension aids, surface active agents, isotonic agents, thickening or emulsifying agents, preservatives, solid binders, lubricants and the like, as suited to the particular dosage form desired. Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Sixteenth Edition, E. W. Martin (Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1980) discloses various carriers used in formulating pharmaceutical compositions and known techniques for the preparation thereof. Except insofar as any conventional carrier medium is incompatible with the compounds of the invention, such as by producing any undesirable biological effect or otherwise interacting in a deleterious manner with any other component(s) of the pharmaceutical composition, its use is contemplated to be within the scope of this invention. Some examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include, but are not limited to, sugars such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; starches such as corn starch and potato starch; cellulose and its derivatives such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; powdered tragacanth; malt; gelatine; talc; excipients such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; oils such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil; safflower oil, sesame oil; olive oil; corn oil and soybean oil; glycols; such as propylene glycol; esters such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; agar; buffering agents such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; alginic acid; pyrogenfree water; isotonic saline; Ringer's solution; ethyl alcohol, and phosphate buffer solutions, as well as other non-toxic compatible lubricants such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, releasing agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the composition, according to the judgment of the formulator.

Uses and Formulations of Compounds of the Invention

As described in more detail herein, in general, the present invention provides compounds useful for the treatment of cancer and proliferative disorders.

As discussed above, certain of the compounds as described herein act as inhibitors of tumor growth and thus are useful in the treatment of cancer and in the inhibition of tumor growth and in the killing of cancer cells. The invention further provides a method for inhibiting tumor growth and/or tumor metastasis. The method involves the administration of a therapeutically effective amount of the compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof to a subject (including, but not limited to a human or animal) in need of it. In certain embodiments, the inventive compounds are useful for the treatment of solid tumors or non-solid tumors. In still other embodiments of interest, the inventive compounds are useful for the treatment of glioblastoma, retinoblastoma, breast cancer, cervical cancer, colon and rectal cancer, leukemia, lymphoma, lung cancer (including, but not limited to small cell lung cancer), melanoma, multiple myeloma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, ovarian cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer and gastric cancer, to name a few.

As described in more detail herein, in general, the present invention provides compounds useful for the treatment of cancer, particularly solid and non-solid tumors. Specifically, certain compounds of the invention have been shown to inhibit the growth of certain tumor cell lines in vitro, as described in more detail herein, and are useful for the treatment of cancer, including solid and non-solid tumors.

As discussed above, the inventive compounds also find use in the prevention of restenosis of blood vessels subject to traumas such as angioplasty and stenting. For example, it is contemplated that the compounds of the invention will be useful as a coating for implanted medical devices, such as tubings, shunts, catheters, artificial implants, pins, electrical implants such as pacemakers, and especially for arterial or venous stents, including balloon-expandable stents. In certain embodiments inventive compounds may be bound to an implantable medical device, or alternatively, may be passively adsorbed to the surface of the implantable device. In certain other embodiments, the inventive compounds may be formulated to be contained within, or, adapted to release by a surgical or medical device or implant, such as, for example, stents, sutures, indwelling catheters, prosthesis, and the like.

In certain exemplary embodiments, the inventive compounds may be used as coating for stents. A stent is typically an open tubular structure that has a pattern (or patterns) of apertures extending from the outer surface of the stent to the lumen. It is commonplace to make stents of biocompatible metallic materials, with the patterns cut on the surface with a laser machine. The stent can be electro-polished to minimize surface irregularities since these irregularities can trigger an adverse biological response. However, stents may still stimulate foreign body reactions that result in thrombosis or restenosis. To avoid these complications, a variety of stent coatings and compositions have been proposed in the prior art literature both to reduce the incidence of these complications or other complications and restore tissue function by itself or by delivering therapeutic compound to the lumen. For example, drugs having antiproliferative and anti-inflammatory activities have been evaluated as stent coatings, and have shown promise in preventing retenosis (See, for example, Presbitero P. et al., “Drug eluting stents do they make the difference?”, Minerva Cardioangiol, 2002, 50(5):431-442; Ruygrok P. N. et al., “Rapamycin in cardiovascular medicine”, Intern. Med. J., 2003, 33(3):103-109; and Marx S. O. et al., “Bench to bedside: the development of rapamycin and its application to stent restenosis”, Circulation, 2001, 104(8):S52-855, each of these references is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). Accordingly, without wishing to be bound to any particular theory, Applicant proposes that the inventive compounds, having antiproliferative effects, can be used as stent coatings and/or in stent drug delivery devices, inter alia for the prevention of restenosis. A variety of compositions and methods related to stent coating and/or local stent drug delivery for preventing restenosis are known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,517,889; 6,273,913; 6,258,121; 6,251,136; 6,248,127; 6,231,600; 6,203,551; 6,153,252; 6,071,305; 5,891,507; 5,837,313 and published U.S. patent application No. U.S. 2001/0027340, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). For example, stents may be coated with polymer-drug conjugates by dipping the stent in polymer-drug solution or spraying the stent with such a solution. In certain embodiment, suitable materials for the implantable device include biocompatible and nontoxic materials, and may be chosen from the metals such as nickel-titanium alloys, steel, or biocompatible polymers, hydrogels, polyurethanes, polyethylenes, ethylenevinyl acetate copolymers, etc. In certain embodiments, the inventive compound, is coated onto a stent for insertion into an artery or vein following balloon angioplasty.

The invention may be described therefore, in certain broad aspects as a method of inhibiting arterial restenosis or arterial occlusion following vascular trauma comprising administering to a subject in need thereof, a composition comprising an inventive compound conjugated to a suitable polymer or polymeric material. In the practice of the method, the subject may be a coronary bypass, vascular surgery, organ transplant or coronary or any other arterial angioplasty patient, for example, and the composition may be administered directly, intravenously, or even coated on a stent to be implanted at the sight of vascular trauma.

In another aspect, the invention encompasses implants and surgical or medical devices, including stents and grafts, coated with or otherwise constructed to contain and/or release any of the inventive compounds disclosed herein. In certain embodiments, the compounds have antiproliferative activity. In certain other embodiments, the compounds inhibit smooth muscle cell proliferation. Representative examples of the inventive implants and surgical or medical devices include cardiovascular devices (e.g., implantable venous catheters, venous ports, tunneled venous catheters, chronic infusion lines or ports, including hepatic artery infusion catheters, pacemaker wires, implantable defibrillators); neurologic/neurosurgical devices (e.g., ventricular peritoneal shunts, ventricular atrial shunts, nerve stimulator devices, dural patches and implants to prevent epidural fibrosis post-laminectomy, devices for continuous subarachnoid infusions); gastrointestinal devices (e.g. chronic indwelling catheters, feeding tubes, portosystemic shunts, shunts for ascites, peritoneal implants for drug delivery, peritoneal dialysis catheters, implantable meshes for hernias, suspensions or solid implants to prevent surgical adhesions, including meshes); genitourinary devices (e.g., uterine implants, including intrauterine devices (IUDs) and devices to prevent endometrial hyperplasia, fallopian tubal implants, including reversible sterilization devices, fallopian tubal stents, artificial sphincters and periurethral implants for incontinence, ureteric stents, chronic indwelling catheters, bladder augmentations, or wraps or splints for vasovasostomy); phthalmonlogic implants (e.g., multino implants and other implants for neovascular glaucoma, drug eluting contact lenses for pterygiums, splints for failed dacrocystalrhinostomy, drug eluting contact lenses for corneal neovascularity, implants for diabetic retinopathy, drug eluting contact lenses for high risk corneal transplants); otolaryngology devices (e.g., ossicular implants, Eustachian tube splints or stents for glue ear or chronic otitis as an alternative to transtempanic drains); plastic surgery implants (e.g., prevention of fibrous contracture in response to gel- or saline-containing breast implants in the subpectoral or subglandular approaches or post-mastectomy, or chin implants), and orthopedic implants (e.g., cemented orthopedic prostheses).

Implants and other surgical or medical devices may be coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) compositions of the present invention in a variety of manners, including for example: (a) by directly affixing to the implant or device an inventive compound or composition (e.g., by either spraying the implant or device with a polymer/drug film, or by dipping the implant or device into a polymer/drug solution, or by other covalent or noncovalent means); (b) by coating the implant or device with a substance such as a hydrogel which will in turn absorb the inventive compound or composition; (c) by interweaving inventive compound- or composition-coated thread (or the polymer itself formed into a thread) into the implant or device; (d) by inserting the implant or device into a sleeve or mesh which is comprised of or coated with an inventive compound or composition; (e) constructing the implant or device itself with an inventive compound or composition; or (f) by otherwise adapting the implant or device to release the inventive compound. In certain embodiments, the composition should firmly adhere to the implant or device during storage and at the time of insertion. The inventive compound or composition should also preferably not degrade during storage, prior to insertion, or when warmed to body temperature after insertion inside the body (if this is required). In addition, it should preferably coat the implant or device smoothly and evenly, with a uniform distribution of inventive compound, while not changing the stent contour. Within preferred embodiments of the invention, the inventive implant or device should provide a uniform, predictable, prolonged release of the inventive compound or composition into the tissue surrounding the implant or device once it has been deployed. For vascular stents, in addition to the above properties, the composition should not render the stent thrombogenic (causing blood clots to form), or cause significant turbulence in blood flow (more than the stent itself would be expected to cause if it was uncoated).

In the case of stents, a wide variety of stents may be developed to contain and/or release the inventive compounds or compositions provided herein, including esophageal stents, gastrointestinal stents, vascular stents, biliary stents, colonic stents, pancreatic stents, ureteric and urethral stents, lacrimal stents, Eustachian tube stents, fallopian tube stents and tracheal/bronchial stents (See, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 6,515,016, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference). Stents may be readily obtained from commercial sources, or constructed in accordance with well-known techniques. Representative examples of stents include those described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,768,523, entitled “Hydrogel Adhesive”; U.S. Pat. No. 4,776,337, entitled “Expandable Intraluminal Graft, and Method and Apparatus for Implanting and Expandable Intraluminal Graft”; U.S. Pat. No. 5,041,126 entitled “Endovascular Stent and Delivery System”; U.S. Pat. No. 5,052,998 entitled “Indwelling Stent and Method of Use”; U.S. Pat. No. 5,064,435 entitled “Self-Expanding Prosthesis Having Stable Axial Length”; U.S. Pat. No. 5,089,606, entitled “Water-insoluble Polysaccharide Hydrogel Foam for Medical Applications”; U.S. Pat. No. 5,147,370, entitled “Nitinol Stent for Hollow Body Conduits”; U.S. Pat. No. 5,176,626, entitled “Indwelling Stent”; U.S. Pat. No. 5,213,580, entitled “Biodegradable Polymeric Endoluminal Sealing Process”; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,328,471, entitled “Method and Apparatus for Treatment of Focal Disease in Hollow Tubular Organs and Other Tissue Lumens.”

As discussed above, the stent coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) compositions of the present invention may be used to eliminate a vascular obstruction and prevent restenosis and/or reduce the rate of restenosis. Within other aspects of the present invention, stents coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) compositions of the present invention are provided for expanding the lumen of a body passageway. Specifically, a stent having a generally tubular structure, and a surface coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) an inventive compound or composition may be inserted into the passageway, such that the passageway is expanded. In certain embodiments, the stent coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) compositions of the present invention may be used to eliminate a biliary, gastrointestinal, esophageal, tracheal/bronchial, urethral or vascular obstruction.

In another aspect of the invention, methods for the treatment of cancer are provided comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I), as described herein, to a subject in need thereof. In certain embodiments, the inventive compounds are useful for the treatment of solid and non-solid tumors. It will be appreciated that the compounds and compositions, according to the method of the present invention, may be administered using any amount and any route of administration effective for the treatment of cancer. Thus, the expression “effective amount” as used herein, refers to a sufficient amount of agent to kill or inhibit the growth of tumor cells, or refers to a sufficient amount to reduce the growth of tumor cells. The exact amount required will vary from subject to subject, depending on the species, age, and general condition of the subject, the severity of the infection, the particular anticancer agent, its mode of administration, and the like. The compounds of the invention are preferably formulated in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. The expression “dosage unit form” as used herein refers to a physically discrete unit of therapeutic agent appropriate for the patient to be treated. It will be understood, however, that the total daily usage of the compounds and compositions of the present invention will be decided by the attending physician within the scope of sound medical judgment. The specific therapeutically effective dose level for any particular patient or organism will depend upon a variety of factors including the disorder being treated and the severity of the disorder; the activity of the specific compound employed; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or coincidental with the specific compound employed; and like factors well known in the medical arts (see, for example, Goodman and Gilman's, “The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics”, Tenth Edition, A. Gilman, J. Hardman and L. Limbird, eds., McGraw-Hill Press, 155-173, 2001, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).

In certain other embodiments, methods are provided for using the inventive implants and other surgical or medical devices coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) compounds and compositions of the present invention. In certain embodiments, methods are provided for preventing restenosis, comprising inserting a stent into an obstructed blood vessel, the stent having a generally tubular structure, the surface of the structure being coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) an inventive compound or composition, such that the obstruction is eliminated and the inventive compound or composition is delivered in amounts effective to prevent restenosis and/or reduce the rate of restenosis. In other embodiments, methods are provided for preventing restenosis, comprising inserting a stent into an obstructed blood vessel, the stent having a generally tubular structure, the surface of the structure being coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) an inventive compound or composition, such that the obstruction is eliminated and the inventive compound or composition is delivered in amounts effective to inhibit smooth muscle cell proliferation.

Within other aspects of the present invention, methods are provided for expanding the lumen of a body passageway, comprising inserting a stent into the passageway, the stent having a generally tubular structure, the surface of the structure being coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) an inventive compound or composition, such that the passageway is expanded. In certain embodiments, the lumen of a body passageway is expanded in order to eliminate a biliary, gastrointestinal, esophageal, tracheal/bronchial, urethral and/or vascular obstruction.

In certain embodiments, methods are provided for eliminating biliary obstructions, comprising inserting a biliary stent into a biliary passageway, the stent having a generally tubular structure, the surface of the structure being coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) an inventive compound or composition, such that the biliary obstruction is eliminated. Briefly, tumor overgrowth of the common bile duct results in progressive cholestatic jaundice which is incompatible with life. Generally, the biliary system which drains bile from the liver into the duodenum is most often obstructed by (1) a tumor composed of bile duct cells (cholangiocarcinoma), (2) a tumor which invades the bile duct (e.g., pancreatic carcinoma), or (3) a tumor which exerts extrinsic pressure and compresses the bile duct (e.g., enlarged lymph nodes). Both primary biliary tumors, as well as other tumors which cause compression of the biliary tree may be treated utilizing stents Implants and other surgical or medical devices may be coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) compositions of the present invention. One example of primary biliary tumors are adenocarcinomas (which are also called Klatskin tumors when found at the bifurcation of the common hepatic duct). These tumors are also referred to as biliary carcinomas, choledocholangiocarcinomas, or adenocarcinomas of the biliary system. Benign tumors which affect the bile duct (e.g., adenoma of the biliary system), and, in rare cases, squamous cell carcinomas of the bile duct and adenocarcinomas of the gallbladder, may also cause compression of the biliary tree and therefore, result in biliary obstruction. Compression of the biliary tree is most commonly due to tumors of the liver and pancreas which compress and therefore obstruct the ducts. Most of the tumors from the pancreas arise from cells of the pancreatic ducts. This is a highly fatal form of cancer (5% of all cancer deaths; 26,000 new cases per year in the U.S.) with an average of 6 months survival and a 1 year survival rate of only 10%. When these tumors are located in the head of the pancreas they frequently cause biliary obstruction, and this detracts significantly from the quality of life of the patient. While all types of pancreatic tumors are generally referred to as “carcinoma of the pancreas” there are histologic subtypes including: adenocarcinoma, adenosquamous carcinoma, cystadenocarcinoma, and acinar cell carcinoma. Hepatic tumors, as discussed above, may also cause compression of the biliary tree, and therefore cause obstruction of the biliary ducts.

In certain embodiments, a biliary stent is first inserted into a biliary passageway in one of several ways: from the top end by inserting a needle through the abdominal wall and through the liver (a percutaneous transhepatic cholangiogram or “PTC”); from the bottom end by cannulating the bile duct through an endoscope inserted through the mouth, stomach, and duodenum (an endoscopic retrograde cholangiogram or “ERCP”); or by direct incision during a surgical procedure. In certain embodiments, a preinsertion examination, PTC, ERCP, or direct visualization at the time of surgery is performed to determine the appropriate position for stent insertion. A guidewire is then advanced through the lesion, and over this a delivery catheter is passed to allow the stent to be inserted in its collapsed form. If the diagnostic exam was a PTC, the guidewire and delivery catheter is inserted via the abdominal wall, while if the original exam was an ERCP the stent may be placed via the mouth. The stent is then positioned under radiologic, endoscopic, or direct visual control taking particular care to place it precisely across the narrowing in the bile duct. The delivery catheter is then removed leaving the stent standing as a scaffolding which holds the bile duct open. A further cholangiogram may be performed to document that the stent is appropriately positioned.

In certain embodiments, methods are provided for eliminating esophageal obstructions, comprising inserting an esophageal stent into an esophagus, the stent having a generally tubular structure, the surface of the structure being coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) an inventive compound or composition, such that the esophageal obstruction is eliminated. Briefly, the esophagus is the hollow tube which transports food and liquids from the mouth to the stomach. Cancer of the esophagus or invasion by cancer arising in adjacent organs (e.g., cancer of the stomach or lung) results in the inability to swallow food or saliva. In certain embodiments, a preinsertion examination, usually a barium swallow or endoscopy is performed in order to determine the appropriate position for stent insertion. A catheter or endoscope may then be positioned through the mouth, and a guidewire is advanced through the blockage. A stent delivery catheter is passed over the guidewire under radiologic or endoscopic control, and a stent is placed precisely across the narrowing in the esophagus. A post-insertion examination, usually a barium swallow x-ray, may be utilized to confirm appropriate positioning.

In certain embodiments, methods are provided for eliminating colonic obstructions, comprising inserting a colonic stent into a colon, the stent having a generally tubular structure, the surface of the structure being coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) an inventive compound or composition, such that the colonic obstruction is eliminated. Briefly, the colon is the hollow tube which transports digested food and waste materials from the small intestines to the anus. Cancer of the rectum and/or colon or invasion by cancer arising in adjacent organs (e.g., cancer of the uterus, ovary, bladder) results in the inability to eliminate feces from the bowel. In certain embodiments, a preinsertion examination, usually a barium enema or colonoscopy is performed in order to determine the appropriate position for stent insertion. A catheter or endoscope may then be positioned through the anus, and a guidewire is advanced through the blockage. A stent delivery catheter is passed over the guidewire under radiologic or endoscopic control, and a stent is placed precisely across the narrowing in the colon or rectum. A post-insertion examination, usually a barium enema x-ray, may be utilized to confirm appropriate positioning.

In certain embodiments, methods are provided for eliminating tracheal/bronchial obstructions, comprising inserting a tracheal/bronchial stent into a trachea or bronchi, the stent having a generally tubular structure, the surface of the structure being coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) an inventive compound or composition, such that the tracheal/bronchial obstruction is eliminated. Briefly, the trachea and bronchi are tubes which carry air from the mouth and nose to the lungs. Blockage of the trachea by cancer, invasion by cancer arising in adjacent organs (e.g. cancer of the lung), or collapse of the trachea or bronchi due to chondromalacia (weakening of the cartilage rings) results in inability to breathe. In certain embodiments, preinsertion examination, usually an endoscopy, is performed in order to determine the appropriate position for stent insertion. A catheter or endoscope is then positioned through the mouth, and a guidewire advanced through the blockage. A delivery catheter is then passed over the guidewire in order to allow a collapsed stent to be inserted. The stent is placed under radiologic or endoscopic control in order to place it precisely across the narrowing. The delivery catheter may then be removed leaving the stent standing as a scaffold on its own. A post-insertion examination, usually a bronchoscopy may be utilized to confirm appropriate positioning.

In certain embodiments, methods are provided for eliminating urethral obstructions, comprising inserting a urethral stent into a urethra, the stent having a generally tubular structure, the surface of the structure being coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) an inventive compound or composition, such that the urethral obstruction is eliminated. Briefly, the urethra is the tube which drains the bladder through the penis. Extrinsic narrowing of the urethra as it passes through the prostate, due to hypertrophy of the prostate, occurs in virtually every man over the age of 60 and causes progressive difficulty with urination. In certain embodiments, a preinsertion examination, usually an endoscopy or urethrogram is first performed in order to determine the appropriate position for stent insertion, which is above the external urinary sphincter at the lower end, and close to flush with the bladder neck at the upper end. An endoscope or catheter is then positioned through the penile opening and a guidewire advanced into the bladder. A delivery catheter is then passed over the guidewire in order to allow stent insertion. The delivery catheter is then removed, and the stent expanded into place. A post-insertion examination, usually endoscopy or retrograde urethrogram, may be utilized to confirm appropriate position.

In certain embodiments, methods are provided for eliminating vascular obstructions, comprising inserting a vascular stent into a blood vessel, the stent having a generally tubular structure, the surface of the structure being coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) an inventive compound or composition, such that the vascular obstruction is eliminated. Briefly, stents may be placed in a wide array of blood vessels, both arteries and veins, to prevent recurrent stenosis at the site of failed angioplasties, to treat narrowings that would likely fail if treated with angioplasty, and to treat post-surgical narrowings (e.g., dialysis graft stenosis). Suitable sites include, but ar enot limited to, the iliac, renal, and coronary arteries, the superior vena cava, and in dialysis grafts. In certain embodiments, angiography is first performed in order to localize the site for placement of the stent. This is typically accomplished by injecting radiopaque contrast through a catheter inserted into an artery or vein as an x-ray is taken. A catheter may then be inserted either percutaneously or by surgery into the femoral artery, brachial artery, femoral vein, or brachial vein, and advanced into the appropriate blood vessel by steering it through the vascular system under fluoroscopic guidance. A stent may then be positioned across the vascular stenosis. A post-insertion angiogram may also be utilized in order to confirm appropriate positioning.

Furthermore, after formulation with an appropriate pharmaceutically acceptable carrier in a desired dosage, the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention can be administered to humans and other animals orally, rectally, parenterally, intracisternally, intravaginally, intraperitoneally, topically (as by powders, ointments, or drops), bucally, as an oral or nasal spray, or the like, depending on the severity of the infection being treated. In certain embodiments, the compounds of the invention may be administered at dosage levels of about 0.001 mg/kg to about 50 mg/kg, from about 0.01 mg/kg to about 25 mg/kg, or from about 0.1 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg of subject body weight per day, one or more times a day, to obtain the desired therapeutic effect. It will also be appreciated that dosages smaller than 0.001 mg/kg or greater than 50 mg/kg (for example 50-100 mg/kg) can be administered to a subject. In certain embodiments, compounds are administered orally or parenterally.

Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include, but are not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active compounds, the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, dimethylformamide, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof. Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents.

Injectable preparations, for example, sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents. The sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution, suspension or emulsion in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1,3-butanediol. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution, U.S.P. and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid are used in the preparation of injectables.

The injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium prior to use.

In order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is often desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension or crystalline or amorphous material with poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution that, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle. Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the drug in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending upon the ratio of drug to polymer and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include (poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissues.

Compositions for rectal or vaginal administration are preferably suppositories which can be prepared by mixing the compounds of this invention with suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.

Solid dosage forms for oral administration include capsules, tablets, pills, powders, and granules. In such solid dosage forms, the active compound is mixed with at least one inert, pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate and/or a) fillers or extenders such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and silicic acid, b) binders such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinylpyrrolidinone, sucrose, and acacia, c) humectants such as glycerol, d) disintegrating agents such as agar—agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate, e) solution retarding agents such as paraffin, f) absorption accelerators such as quaternary ammonium compounds, g) wetting agents such as, for example, cetyl alcohol and glycerol monostearate, h) absorbents such as kaolin and bentonite clay, and i) lubricants such as talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and mixtures thereof. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the dosage form may also comprise buffering agents.

Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like. The solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions that can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.

The active compounds can also be in micro-encapsulated form with one or more excipients as noted above. The solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings, release controlling coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. In such solid dosage forms the active compound may be admixed with at least one inert diluent such as sucrose, lactose and starch. Such dosage forms may also comprise, as in normal practice, additional substances other than inert diluents, e.g., tableting lubricants and other tableting aids such as magnesium stearate and microcrystalline cellulose. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the dosage forms may also comprise buffering agents. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes.

Dosage forms for topical or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention include ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, powders, solutions, sprays, inhalants or patches. The active component is admixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and any needed preservatives or buffers as may be required. Ophthalmic formulation, ear drops, and eye drops are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention. Additionally, the present invention contemplates the use of transdermal patches, which have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound to the body. Such dosage forms are made by dissolving or dispensing the compound in the proper medium. Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or by dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.

It will also be appreciated that the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention can be formulated and employed in combination therapies, that is, the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions can be formulated with or administered concurrently with, prior to, or subsequent to, one or more other desired therapeutics or medical procedures. The particular combination of therapies (therapeutics or procedures) to employ in a combination regimen will take into account compatibility of the desired therapeutics and/or procedures and the desired therapeutic effect to be achieved. It will also be appreciated that the therapies employed may achieve a desired effect for the same disorder (for example, an inventive compound may be administered concurrently with another anticancer agent), or they may achieve different effects (e.g., control of any adverse effects). For example, other therapies or anticancer agents that may be used in combination with the inventive anticancer agents of the present invention include surgery, radiotherapy (in but a few examples, γ-radiation, neutron beam radiotherapy, electron beam radiotherapy, proton therapy, brachytherapy, and systemic radioactive isotopes, to name a few), endocrine therapy, biologic response modifiers (interferons, interleukins, and tumor necrosis factor (TNF) to name a few), hyperthermia and cryotherapy, agents to attenuate any adverse effects (e.g., antiemetics), and other approved chemotherapeutic drugs, including, but not limited to, alkylating drugs (mechlorethamine, chlorambucil, Cyclophosphamide, Melphalan, Ifosfamide), antimetabolites (Methotrexate), purine antagonists and pyrimidine antagonists (6-Mercaptopurine, 5-Fluorouracil, Cytarabile, Gemcitabine), spindle poisons (Vinblastine, Vincristine, Vinorelbine, Paclitaxel), podophyllotoxins (Etoposide, Irinotecan, Topotecan), antibiotics (Doxorubicin, Bleomycin, Mitomycin), nitrosoureas (Carmustine, Lomustine), inorganic ions (Cisplatin, Carboplatin), enzymes (Asparaginase), and hormones (Tamoxifen, Leuprolide, Flutamide, and Megestrol), to name a few. For a more comprehensive discussion of updated cancer therapies see, The Merck Manual, Seventeenth Ed. 1999, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference. See also the National Cancer Institute (NCI) website (www.nci.nih.gov) and the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) website for a list of the FDA approved oncology drugs (www.fda.gov/cder/cancer/druglistframe—See Appendix A).

In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention further comprise one or more additional therapeutically active ingredients (e.g., chemotherapeutic and/or palliative). For purposes of the invention, the term “Palliative” refers to treatment that is focused on the relief of symptoms of a disease and/or side effects of a therapeutic regimen, but is not curative. For example, palliative treatment encompasses painkillers, antinausea medications and anti-sickness drugs. In addition, chemotherapy, radiotherapy and surgery can all be used palliatively (that is, to reduce symptoms without going for cure; e.g., for shrinking tumors and reducing pressure, bleeding, pain and other symptoms of cancer).

Treatment Kits

In other embodiments, the present invention relates to a kit for conveniently and effectively carrying out the methods in accordance with the present invention. In general, the pharmaceutical pack or kit comprises one or more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention. Such kits are especially suited for the delivery of solid oral forms such as tablets or capsules. Such a kit preferably includes a number of unit dosages, and may also include a card having the dosages oriented in the order of their intended use. If desired, a memory aid can be provided, for example in the form of numbers, letters, or other markings or with a calendar insert, designating the days in the treatment schedule in which the dosages can be administered. Alternatively, placebo dosages, or calcium dietary supplements, either in a form similar to or distinct from the dosages of the pharmaceutical compositions, can be included to provide a kit in which a dosage is taken every day. Optionally associated with such container(s) can be a notice in the form prescribed by a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use or sale of pharmaceutical products, which notice reflects approval by the agency of manufacture, use or sale for human administration.

Equivalents

The representative examples that follow are intended to help illustrate the invention, and are not intended to, nor should they be construed to, limit the scope of the invention. Indeed, various modifications of the invention and many further embodiments thereof, in addition to those shown and described herein, will become apparent to those skilled in the art from the full contents of this document, including the examples which follow and the references to the scientific and patent literature cited herein. It should further be appreciated that the contents of those cited references are incorporated herein by reference to help illustrate the state of the art.

The following examples contain important additional information, exemplification and guidance that can be adapted to the practice of this invention in its various embodiments and the equivalents thereof.

Exemplification

The practitioner has a well-established literature of peptide chemistry to draw upon, in combination with the information contained herein, for guidance on synthetic strategies, protecting groups, and other materials and methods useful for the synthesis of the compounds of this invention.

The various references cited herein provide helpful background information on preparing compounds similar to the inventive compounds described herein or relevant intermediates, as well as information on formulation, uses, and administration of such compounds which may be of interest.

Moreover, the practitioner is directed to the specific guidance and examples provided in this document relating to various exemplary compounds and intermediates thereof.

The compounds of this invention and their preparation can be understood further by the examples that illustrate some of the processes by which these compounds are prepared or used. It will be appreciated, however, that these examples do not limit the invention. Variations of the invention, now known or further developed, are considered to fall within the scope of the present invention as described herein and as hereinafter claimed.

According to the present invention, any available techniques can be used to make or prepare the inventive compounds or compositions including them. For example, a variety of solution phase synthetic methods such as those discussed in detail below may be used. Alternatively or additionally, the inventive compounds may be prepared using any of a variety combinatorial techniques, parallel synthesis and/or solid phase synthetic methods known in the art.

It will be appreciated as described below, that a variety of inventive compounds can be synthesized according to the methods described herein. The starting materials and reagents used in preparing these compounds are either available from commercial suppliers such as Aldrich Chemical Company (Milwaukee, Wis.), Bachem (Torrance, Calif.), Sigma (St. Louis, Mo.), or are prepared by methods well known to a person of ordinary skill in the art following procedures described in such references as Fieser and Fieser 1991, “Reagents for Organic Synthesis”, vols 1-17, John Wiley and Sons, New York, N.Y., 1991; Rodd 1989 “Chemistry of Carbon Compounds”, vols. 1-5 and supps, Elsevier Science Publishers, 1989; “Organic Reactions”, vols 1-40, John Wiley and Sons, New York, N.Y., 1991; March 2001, “Advanced Organic Chemistry”, 5th ed. John Wiley and Sons, New York, N.Y.; and Larock 1990, “Comprehensive Organic Transformations: A Guide to Functional Group Preparations”, 2^(nd) ed. VCH Publishers. These schemes are merely illustrative of some methods by which the compounds of this invention can be synthesized, and various modifications to these schemes can be made and will be suggested to a person of ordinary skill in the art having regard to this disclosure.

The starting materials, intermediates, and compounds of this invention may be isolated and purified using conventional techniques, including filtration, distillation, crystallization, chromatography, and the like. They may be characterized using conventional methods, including physical constants and spectral data.

Certain exemplary compounds of the invention are listed below and are referred to by compound number as indicated. Compound Structure ER-803840 (HEMIASTERLIN)

ER-803887

ER-803888

ER-803889

ER-803890

ER-803921

ER-803995

ER-803996

ER-803997 Higher Rf diastereomer

ER-803998 Lower Rf diastereomer

ER-803999

ER-804000

ER-804001

ER-804002

ER-804332

ER-804333

ER-804334

ER-804635

ER-804636

ER-804762

ER-805206

ER-805230

ER-805231

ER-805257

ER-805258

ER-805268

ER-805316

ER-805324

ER-805532

ER-805590

ER-805594

ER-805599

ER-805697

ER-805701

ER-805711

ER-805713

ER-805734

ER-805735

ER-805736

ER-805738

ER-805847

ER-805865

ER-805876

ER-805913

ER-805914

ER-805925

ER-805938

ER-805968

ER-805974

ER-806004

ER-806005

ER-806021

ER-806022

ER-806023

ER-806031

ER-806032

ER-806073

ER-806085

ER-806086

ER-806105

ER-806110

ER-806119

ER-806135

ER-806147

ER-806180

ER-806223

ER-806318

ER-806356

ER-806371

ER-806395

ER-806396

ER-806397

ER-806398

ER-806399

ER-806400

ER-806409

ER-806418

ER-806713

ER-806717

ER-806718

ER-806735

ER-806748

ER-806749

ER-806791

ER-806792

ER-806793

ER-806794

ER-806822

ER-806823

ER-806824

ER-806825

ER-806830

ER-806831

ER-806853

ER-806854

ER-806861

ER-806862

ER-806863

ER-806864

ER-806865

ER-806866

ER-806867

ER-806868

ER-806869

ER-806870

ER-806871

ER-806879

ER-806880

ER-806881

ER-806882

ER-806920

ER-806921

ER-806922

ER-806923

ER-806924

ER-806925

ER-807000

ER-807001

ER-807002

ER-807077 single diastereomer

ER-807078 single diastereomer

ER-807079

ER-807080

ER-807081 single diastereomer

ER-807096

ER-807101

ER-807102

ER-807133

ER-807134

ER-807135

ER-807145

ER-807146

ER-807147

ER-807148

ER-807160

ER-807161

ER-807180

ER-807192

ER-807193

ER-807194

ER-807195

ER-807209

ER-807210

ER-807212

ER-807213

ER-807214

ER-807215

ER-807217

ER-807218

ER-807219

ER-807222

ER-807226

ER-807228

ER-807229

ER-807230

ER-807231

ER-807232

ER-807237

ER-807238

ER-807246

ER-807247

ER-807248

ER-807249

ER-807303

ER-807324

ER-807328

ER-807329

ER-807332

ER-807334

ER-807339

ER-807341

ER-807342

ER-807343

ER-807344

ER-807345

ER-807346

ER-807347

ER-807352

ER-807353

ER-807354

ER-807355

ER-807360

ER-807361

R-807362

ER-807364

ER-807365

ER-807366

ER-807370

ER-807371

ER-807374

ER-807375

ER-807393

ER-807413

ER-807414

ER-807417

ER-807418

ER-807419

ER-807420

ER-807421

ER-807431

ER-807461

ER-807470 single diastereomer

ER-807471 single diastereomer

ER-807480 single diastereomer

ER-807481 single diastereomer

ER-807482 single diastereomer

ER-807483 single diastereomer

ER-807484

ER-807487

ER-807494

ER-807495

ER-807499

ER-807500

ER-807501

ER-807502

ER-807503

ER-807504

ER-807529

ER-807530

ER-807533

ER-807534

ER-807535

ER-807540

ER-807541

ER-807542

ER-807575

ER-807576

ER-807577

ER-807602

ER-807603

ER-807619

ER-807620

ER-807621

ER-807622

ER-807625

ER-807626

ER-807739

ER-807740

ER-807742

ER-807743

ER-807744

ER-807745

ER-807760

ER-807761

ER-807796 Trans-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer.

ER-807797 Trans-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer.

ER-807798

ER-807799 Mixture of two diastereomers

ER-807800

ER-807801

ER-807802

ER-807803

ER-807804

ER-807805

ER-807806

ER-807807

ER-807808

ER-807809

ER-807810

ER-807811

ER-807812

ER-807820 single diastereomer

ER-807821 single diastereomer

ER-807829

ER-807830

ER-807831

ER-807832

ER-807833

ER-807839

ER-807840

ER-807842

ER-807844

ER-807846

ER-807850

ER-807860

ER-807861

ER-807863 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer.

ER-807864 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer.

ER-807874

ER-807875

ER-807877 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring. Two diastereomers (4:1).

ER-807880

ER-807881

ER-807882

ER-807883

ER-807884

ER-807885

ER-807886

ER-807888

ER-807889

ER-807890

ER-807891

ER-807899

ER-807900

ER-807902

ER-807904

ER-807905

ER-807906

ER-807907

ER-807908

ER-807909

ER-807911

ER-807944

ER-807945

ER-807947

ER-807948

ER-807949

ER-807950

ER-807951

ER-807953

ER-807954

ER-807959 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer.

ER-807960 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer.

ER-807961

ER-807963

ER-807973

ER-807974

ER-807975

ER-807981

ER-807982

ER-807983

ER-807986

ER-807987

ER-807988

ER-807989

ER-807990

ER-807991

ER-807992

ER-807994

ER-807995

ER-807996

ER-807997

ER-807998

ER-807999

ER-808000

ER-808001

ER-808002

ER-808007

ER-808008

ER-808010

ER-808011

ER-808012

ER-808013

ER-808029

ER-808030

ER-808031

ER-808032

ER-808033

ER-808034

ER-808035

ER-808037

ER-808038

ER-898057

ER-808058

ER-808059

ER-808060

ER-808061

ER-808062

ER-808063

ER-808065 Trans-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereorner.

ER-808066 Trans-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereorner.

ER-808067 Trans-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereorner.

ER-808068 Trans-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereorner.

ER-808071 Trans-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereorner.

ER-808072 Trans-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereorner.

ER-808073 Trans-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereorner.

ER-808074 Trans-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereorner.

ER-808075

ER-808076

ER-808077

ER-808108

ER-808109

ER-808110

ER-808111

ER-808112

ER-808113

ER-808114

ER-808115

ER-808116

ER-808117

ER-808118

ER-808119

ER-808120

ER-808121

ER-808122

ER-808123

ER-808124

ER-808125

ER-808126 Absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808131

ER-808139

ER-808140

ER-808141

ER-808142

ER-808143

ER-808144

ER-808145

ER-808146

ER-808147

ER-808148

ER-808149

ER-808150

ER-808161

ER-808166

ER-808167

ER-808168

ER-808169

ER-808170

ER-808171

ER-808172

ER-808173

ER-808174

ER-808175

ER-808176

ER-808177

ER-808178

ER-808179

ER-808180

ER-808181

ER-808182

ER-808183

ER-808189

ER-808190

ER-808191

ER-808192

ER-808193

ER-808194

ET-808195

ER-808196

ER-808197

ER-808198

ER-808199

ER-808200

ER-808201

ER-808202

ER-808203

ER-808204 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808205 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808206

ER-808207

ER-808208

ER-808209

ER-808210

ER-808211

ER-808212

ER-808213

ER-808214

ER-808215

ER-808216

ER-808217

ER-808218

ER-808219

ER-808220

ER-808221

ER-808222

ER-808223

ER-808224

ER-808225

ER-808226

ER-808248

ER-808249

ER-808251

ER-808253

ER-808292

ER-808293

ER-808294

ER-808295

ER-808296

ER-808297

ER-808298

ER-808299

ER-808300

ER-808301-

ER-808302

ER-808303

ER-808304

ER-808305

ER-808306

ER-808307

ER-808308

ER-808309

ER-808323

ER-808324

ER-808325

ER-808326

ER-808328

ER-808329

ER-808330

ER-808331

ER-808332

ER-808333

ER-808334

ER-808335

ER-808336

ER-808337

ER-808338

ER-808339

ER-808340

ER-808341

ER-808342

ER-808343

ER-808344

ER-808345

ER-808357 single diastereomer

ER-808358 single diastereomer

ER-808359 single diastereomer

ER-808366 single diastereomer

ER-808367

ER-808368

ER-808383

ER-808384

ER-808389

ER-808390

ER-808391

ER-808392

ER-808393

ER-808394

ER-808395

ER-808396

ER-808397

ER-808398

ER-808399

ER-808400

ER-808401

ER-808402

ER-808403

ER-808404

ER-808433

ER-808434

ER-808435

ER-808436

ER-808437

ER-808447 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808448 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808449 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808450 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808451 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808452 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808453 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808454 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808475 single diastereomer

ER-808476 single diastereomer

ER-808477 single diastereomer

ER-808478 single diastereomer

ER-808479

ER-808480

ER-808481

ER-808482

ER-808483

ER-808484

ER-808485

ER-808486

ER-808487

ER-808488

ER-808489

ER-808490

ER-808491 Single diastereomer

ER-808492 Single diastereomer

ER-808493 Single diastereomer

ER-808494 Single diastereomer

ER-808495

ER-808552

ER-808553

ER-808563

ER-808564

ER-808565

ER-808566

ER-808567

ER-808568

ER-808609

ER-808610

ER-808656 Single diastereomer

ER-808662 Single diastereomer

ER-808674

ER-808676

ER-808677

ER-808678

ER-808679

ER-808680

ER-808681

ER-808682

ER-808683

ER-808684

ER-808685

ER-808686

ER-808687

ER-808688

ER-808689

ER-808690

ER-808693

ER-808694

ER-808695

ER-808696

ER-808697

ER-808698

ER-808699

ER-808700

ER-808706 Single diastereomer

ER-808707 Single diastereomer

ER-808708 Single diastereomer

ER-80870 Single diastereomer

ER-808710 Single diastereomer

ER-808731

ER-808732

ER-808774 Single diastereomer

ER-808775 Single diastereomer

ER-808777 Single diastereomer

ER-808779 Single diastereomer

ER-808780 Single diastereomer

ER-808815 Single diastereomer

ER-808816 Single diastereomer

ER-808817 Single diastereomer

ER-808818 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808819 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808820 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808821 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808822 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808823 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808824

ER-808825

ER-808826 Single diastereomer

ER-808827 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808828 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808829 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808830 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808831 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808832 Cis-substituents on the piperidine ring, but absolute stereochemistry is unknown. Single diastereomer

ER-808861

ER-808862

ER-808863

ER-808864

ER-808865

ER-808866

ER-808867

ER-808868

ER-808869

ER-808870

ER-808871

ER-808872

ER-808873

ER-808874

ER-808875

ER-808876

ER-808877

ER-808878

ER-808879

ER-808880

ER-808881

ER-808882

ER-808883

ER-808884

ER-808885

ER-808886

ER-808887

ER-808888

ER-808889

ER-808890

ER-808891

ER-808892

ER-808893

ER-808894

ER-808895

ER-808896

ER-808897

ER-808898

ER-808899

ER-808900

ER-808901

ER-808902

ER-808903

ER-808904

ER-808905

ER-808906

ER-808907

ER-808908

ER-808909

ER-808910

ER-808911

ER-808912

ER-808913

ER-808914

ER-808915

ER-808916

ER-808917

ER-808918

ER-808919

ER-808920

ER-808921

ER-808922

ER-808923

ER-808987

ER-808988

ER-808990

ER-809040 Single diastereomer

ER-809041

ER-809043

ER-809044

ER-809045 Single diastereomer

ER-809046

ER-809054

ER-809055

ER-809056

ER-809057

ER-809058

ER-809059

ER-809060

ER-809061

ER-809062

ER-809063

ER-809064

ER-809065

ER-809066

ER-809067

ER-809068

ER-809069

ER-809070

ER-809071

ER-809072

ER-809073

ER-809074

ER-809075

ER-809076

ER-809077

ER-809078

ER-809079

ER-809080

ER-809081

ER-809082

ER-809083

ER-809084

ER-809085

ER-809086

ER-809087

ER-809088

ER-809089

ER-809090

ER-809091

ER-809092

ER-809093

ER-809094

ER-809095

ER-809096

ER-809097

ER-809098

ER-809099

ER-809100

ER-809101

ER-809102

ER-809103

ER-809104

ER-809105

ER-809106

ER-809107

ER-809108

ER-809109

ER-809110

ER-809111

ER-809112

ER-809113

ER-809114

ER-809115

ER-809116

ER-809117

ER-809118

ER-809119

ER-809120

ER-809121

ER-809122

ER-809123

ER-809124

ER-809125

ER-809126

ER-809127

ER-809128

ER-809129

ER-809130

ER-809131

ER-809132

ER-809133

ER-809134

ER-809135

ER-809136

ER-809137

ER-809138

ER-809139

ER-809140

ER-809141

ER-809142

ER-809143

ER-809144

ER-809145

ER-809146

ER-809147

ER-809148

ER-809149

ER-809150

ER-809151

ER-809152

ER-809153

ER-809154

ER-809155

ER-809156

ER-809157

ER-809158

ER-809159

ER-809160

ER-809161

ER-809162

ER-809163

ER-809164

ER-809165

ER-809166

ER-809167

ER-809240

ER-809241

ER-809242

ER-809243

ER-809244

ER-809245

ER-809246

ER-809247

ER-809268

ER-809269

ER-809282

ER-809283

ER-809284

ER-809285

ER-809300

ER-809301

ER-809302

ER-809303

ER-809304

ER-809305

ER-809306

ER-809308

ER-809309

ER-809310

ER-809311

ER-809312

ER-809313

ER-809314

ER-809315

ER-809316

ER-809317

ER-809318

ER-809319

ER-809320

ER-809321

ER-809322

ER-809323

ER-809324

ER-809325

ER-809326

ER-809638

ER-809640

ER-809641 Single diastereomer

ER-809642 Single diastereomer

ER-809643 Single diastereomer

ER-809644 Single diastereomer

ER-809645

ER-809646

ER-809647 Single diastereomer

ER-809648 Single diastereomer

ER-809649 Single diastereomer

ER-809650 Single diastereomer

General Reaction Procedures:

Unless mentioned specifically, reaction mixtures were stirred using a magnetically driven stirrer bar. An inert atmosphere refers to either dry argon or dry nitrogen. Reactions were monitored either by thin layer chromatography (TLC), by proton nuclear magnetic resonance or by high-pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC), of a suitably worked up sample of the reaction mixture.

Listed below are abbreviations used for some common organic reagents referred to herein: BOG or Di-tert-Butyl dicarbonate BOC₂O: CMC: 1-Cyclohexyl-3-(2-morpholinoethyl)carbodiimide metho-p- toluenesulfonate DCM: Dichloromethane DEPC: Diethylphosphoryl cyanide (Diethyl cyanophosphonate) DIBAL: Diisobutylaluminum hydride DIEA: Diisopropylethylamine DMF: N,N-Dimethylformamide DMSO: Dimethylsulfoxide Ether: Diethyl ether HBTU: O-(1-H-benzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N,N-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate HOAt: 1-Hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole LAH: Lithium aluminum hydride MSA: Methane sulfonic acid NMM: N-Methyl Morpholine TBME: Tert-butyl methyl ether TFA: Trifluoroacetic acid THF: Tetrahydrofuran TMEDA: Tetramethylethylenediamine

General Work Up Procedures:

Unless mentioned specifically, reaction mixtures were cooled to room temperature or below then quenched, when necessary, with either water or a saturated aqueous solution of ammonium chloride. Desired products were extracted by partitioning between water and a suitable water-immiscible solvent (eg. ethyl acetate, dichloromethane, diethyl ether). The desired product containing extracts were washed appropriately with water followed by a saturated solution of brine. On occasions where the product containing extract was deemed to contain residual oxidants, the extract was washed with a 10% solution of sodium thiosulphate in saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution, prior to the aforementioned washing procedure. On occasions where the product containing extract was deemed to contain residual acids, the extract was washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution, prior to the aforementioned washing procedure (except in those cases where the desired product itself had acidic character). On occasions where the product containing extract was deemed to contain residual bases, the extract was washed with 10% aqueous citric acid solution, prior to the aforementioned washing procedure (except in those cases where the desired product itself had basic character). Post washing, the desired product containing extracts were dried over anhydrous magnesium sulphate, then filtered. The crude products were then isolated by removal of solvent(s) by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure, at an appropriate temperature (generally less than 45° C.).

On occasions where triphenylphosphine oxide was a major byproduct of the reaction, the reaction mixture was added directly to a large volume of well-stirred hexane. The resultant precipitate of triphenylphosphine oxide was removed by filtration and the filtrate processed in the usual manner.

General Purification Procedures:

Chromatographic purification refers either to flash column chromatography on silica, using a single solvent or mixed solvent as eluent, or HPLC on a C18 column. Suitably purified desired product containing elutes were combined and concentrated under reduced pressure at an appropriate temperature (generally less than 45° C.) to constant mass. Final compounds were prepared for biological testing by either a) dissolved in 50% aqueous acetonitrile, filtered and transferred to vials, then freeze-dried under high vacuum; or b) dissolved in methanol, filtered and transferred to vials, then concentrated to dryness using a Centrifugal vacuum evaporator.

EXAMPLE 1

Preparation of Amine Esters 18, Amine Acids 20 and Amine Amides 23

Preparation of Compound 13

To a solution of Compound 12 (205 mg) in DMF (3.8 ml), at room temperature, was added (S)—N-Boc-neo-phenylalanine (6) (140 mg), NMM (0.30 ml), HOAt (0.124 g), and CMC (1.166 g). The reaction mixture was shaken at room temperature for 24 hr. Aqueous workup followed by chromatographic purification gave Compound 13 (153 mg, 61%).

Preparation of Compound 14

To a solution of compound 13 (153 mg) in methanol (20 ml), at 0° C., was added sodium borohydride (3.18 g) portionwise with shaking over a 3 day period. The reaction mixture temperature was maintained between 0°-5° C. On occasion where the reaction mixture turned into a solidified mass, THF was added to aid agitation. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature then re-cooled to 0° C. and worked up in the usual manner to give compound 14 (140 mg, 96%).

Preparation of Compound 15

To a solution of compound 14 (50 mg) in THF (3 ml), at room temperature, was added Dess Martin periodinane (204 mg) in one portion. The resultant suspension was stirred vigorously for 4.5 hr. An aqueous work up gave crude compound 15 (50 mg) which was used immediately in the next stage without purification.

General Procedure for the Preparation of Amine Esters 18

To a solution of compound 15 (1 equivalent) in a suitable volume of 1,2-dichloroethane, at room temperature, was added 4A molecular sieves (crushed and dried) (equal mass to that of the amine hydrochloride). A suitably chosen amine hydrochloride (16) (10 equivalents) was added with vigorous stirring followed by sodium triacetoxyborohydride (1.5 equivalents). The reaction mixture was stirred at an appropriate temperature (20°-50° C.) until compound 15 was consumed to a satisfactory degree. Aqueous work up followed by chromatographic purification gave the corresponding N-Boc Amine Ester 17. Deprotection of the N-Boc moiety under suitable conditions would give the corresponding N-terminal free amine 18.

General Procedure for the Preparation of Amine Acids 20

To a solution of the N-Boc Amine Ester 17 in a suitable mixture of THF and methanol, was added 1M lithium hydroxide solution (10-50 equivalents). When the N-Boc Amine Ester 17 was hydrolyzed to a satisfactory degree, the reaction mixture was given an aqueous work up. The N-Boc Amine Acid 19 was purified chromatographically. Deprotection of the N-Boc moiety under suitable conditions would give the corresponding N-terminal free amine 20.

General Procedure for the Preparation of Amine Amides 23

To a solution of the N-Boc Anine Acid 19 in DMF, at room temperature, was added NMM (20 equivalents). A suitably chosen anine hydrochloride (21) (20 equivalents) was added followed by DEPC (20 equivalents). When the N-Boc Canine Acid 19 was consumed to a satisfactory degree the N-Boc Amine Amide 22 was isolated either by direct chromatographic purification of the reaction mixture, or by an aqueous work up followed by chromatographic purification. Deprotection of the N-Boc moiety under suitable conditions would give the corresponding N-terminal free amine 23.

EXAMPLE 2

Preparation of N-Acetyl Amine Amides 27

Preparation of Compound 24

To a solution of aldehyde 13 (50 mg) in 1,2-dichloroethane (2 ml), at room temperature, was added 4A molecular sieves (crushed and dried) (50 mg). Glycine methyl ester hydrochloride (120 mg) was added with vigorous stirring followed by sodium triacetoxyborohydride (205 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred at 40° C.) for two hours. Aqueous work up followed by chromatographic purification gave compound 24 (31 mg, 46%).

Preparation of Compound 25

To a solution of compound 24 (5.5 mg) in DMF (0.4 ml), at room temperature, was added pyridine (0.006 ml) followed by acetic anhydride (0.004 ml). The reaction mixture was shaken for three hours at room temperature then concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The residue was dissolved in saturated HCl in methanol (1 ml) and stood at room temperature for 15 minutes. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo to give compound 25 (4 mg, 90%).

Preparation of Compound 26

To a solution of compound 25 (3.35 mg) in methanol (0.2 mL), was added 1 M lithium hydroxide solution (0.118 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5 hr. Chromatographic purification followed by treatment with methanolic HCl gave the hydrochloride salt of compound 26 (1.95 mg, 61%).

General Procedure for the Preparation of N-Acetyl Amine Amides 27

To a solution of compound 26 (1 equivalent) in DMF, at room temperature, was added NMM (20 equivalents). A suitably chosen amine hydrochloride (21) (20 equivalents) was added followed by DEPC (20 equivalents). When compound 26 was consumed to a satisfactory degree the N-Acetyl Amine Amide (27) was isolated by direct chromatographic purification of the reaction mixture.

EXAMPLE 3

Preparation of Compound 33

Preparation of Compound 28

To a solution of compound 3b (1.94 g) in dry DCM (20 mL), at 0° C. under an inert atmosphere, was added a 1 M solution of DIBAL (32 mL) dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 2.5 hr then methanol (4.4 mL) was added dropwise followed by a saturated solution of ammonium chloride (8.8 mL). DCM (200 mL) was added and the reaction mixture stirred vigorously at room temperature for 30 min. Filtration followed by concentrated in vacuo gave crude compound 28 (1.08 g, 65%).

Preparation of Compound 29

To a solution of compound 28 (207 mg) in THF (5 mL), at 0° C. under an inert atmosphere, was added sodium hydride (60% dispersion in mineral oil; 160 mg) portionwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 45 min then treated with ethyl bromoacetate (0.47 mL). The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature. An aqueous work up followed by chromatographic purification gave an intermediate Boc compound (185 mg, 67%). The intermediate Boc compound (139 mg) was dissolved in ethanol (2 mL) and treated with saturated HCl in ethanol (2 mL). The reaction mixture was stood at room temperature for 10 min then concentrated in vacuo to dryness to give compound 29 (114 mg).

Preparation of Compound 30

To a solution of compound 29 (114 mg) in DMF (1.8 mL), at room temperature, was added (S)—N-Boc-tert-leucine (4) (283 mg), NMM (0.135 mL), HOAt (56 mg), and CMC (518 mg). The reaction mixture was shaken at room temperature for 16 hr. Aqueous workup followed by chromatographic purification gave an intermediate Boc compound (42 mg, 22%). The intermediate Boc compound (42 mg) was dissolved in saturated HCl in ethanol (5 mL) and stood at room temperature for 1 min. Concentration in vacuo gave compound 30 (37 mg).

Preparation of Compound 31

To a solution of compound 30 (24 mg) in DMF (0.26 mL), at room temperature, was added (S)—N-Boc-neo-phenylalanine (6) (38 mg), NMM (0.014 mL), HOAt (8.3 mg), and CMC (52 mg). The reaction mixture was shaken at room temperature for 16 hr. Aqueous workup followed by chromatographic purification gave an intermediate Boc compound (38 mg, 64%). The intermediate Boc compound (38 mg) was dissolved in saturated HCl in ethanol (5 mL) and stood at room temperature for 10 min. Concentration in vacuo gave compound 31 as its HCl salt.

Preparation of Compound 32

A solution of compound 31 (4 mg) in ethanol (2 mL) was treated with 1 M lithium hydroxide (0.5 ml). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 hr. Aqueous work up followed by chromatographic purification gave compound 32 (2.9 mg, 76%).

Preparation of Compound 33

To a solution of compound 32 (1.9 mg) in DMF (70 μl), at room temperature, was added NMM (3.8 μl), pyrrolidine (2.8 μl), and DEPC (5.2 μl). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hr. The reaction mixture was purified chromatographically to give compound 33 (1.2 mg, 58%).

EXAMPLE 4

Preparation of Amine Esters 42, Amine Acids 43 and Amine Amides 45

Preparation of Compound 39

To a solution of compound 12 (1.25 g) in DMF (21 mL), at room temperature, was added (R)-N-methylpipecoline hydrochloride (38) (0.38 g), NMM (1.4 mL), HOAt (0.575 g), and CMC (5.37 g). The reaction mixture was shaken at room temperature for 24 hr. Aqueous workup gave compound 39 (0.511 g, 63%).

Preparation of Compound 40

To a solution of compound 0.39 (0.8 g) in methanol (8 mL), at 0° C., was added sodium borohydride (7.9 g) portionwise over a 3 day period. The reaction mixture temperature was maintained between 0°-5° C. On occasion where the reaction mixture turned into a solidified mass, THF was added to aid stirring. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature then re-cooled to 0° C. and quenched with saturated sodium bicarbonate solution. Aqueous workup gave compound 40.

Preparation of Compound 41

To a solution of compound 40 (50 mg) in THF (3 mL), at room temperature, was added Dess Martin periodinane (225 mg) in one portion. The resultant suspension was stirred vigorously for 4 hr. An aqueous work up gave crude compound 41 (55 mg) which was used immediately in the next stage without purification.

General Procedure for the Preparation of N-terminal N-heterocyclic Amine Esters 42

To a solution of compound 41 (300 mg) in 1,2-dichloroethane (10 mL), at room temperature, was added 4 A molecular sieves (crushed and dried) (1.5 g). The amino acid ester hydrochloride (16) (10 equivalents) was added and the reaction mixture stirred vigorously for 10 min. Sodium triacetoxyborohydride (290 mg) was added in one portion and the reaction mixture stirred vigorously at room temperature. When compound 41 was consumed to a satisfactory degree, the reaction mixture was given an aqueous work up. The N-terminal N-heterocyclic Amine Esters 42 was purified chromatographically, except in cases where it was deemed unnecessary.

General Procedure for the Preparation of N-terminal N-heterocyclic Amine Acids 43

To a solution of the N-terminal N-heterocyclic Amine Esters (42) in a suitable mixture of THE and methanol, was added 1 M lithium hydroxide solution (10-50 equivalents). When the N-terminal N-heterocyclic Amine Esters 42 was hydrolyzed to a satisfactory degree, the reaction mixture was given an aqueous work up. The N-terminal N-heterocyclic Amine acid 43 was purified chromatographically, except in cases where it was deemed unnecessary.

General Procedure for the Preparation of N-terminal N-heterocyclic Amine Amides 45

To a solution of the N-terminal N-heterocyclic Amine acid 43 in DMF, at room temperature, was added NMM (20 equivalents). A suitably chosen amine hydrochloride (44) (20 equivalents) was added followed by DEPC (20 equivalents). When the N-terminal N-heterocyclic Amine acid 43 was consumed to a satisfactory degree the N-terminal N-heterocyclic Amine Amide 45 was isolated either by direct chromatographic purification of the reaction mixture, or by an aqueous work up followed by chromatographic purification.

EXAMPLE 5

Preparation of Compounds 51 and 52

Step 1: Preparation of Compound 49:

Preparation of Compound 47:

Procedure a.

Compound 46 (1.0405 g, 4.4984 mmol) was dissolved in DMF (8.0 mL). K₂CO₃ (0.6258 g, 4.5279 mmol) was added. Methyl iodide (0.6 mL, 9.6379 mmol) was added. The milky suspension was stirred at room temp under nitrogen for 3 days. Standard aqueous workup yielded ester 47 as a colorless oil (1.0590 g, 96%).

Preparation of compound 2:

Compound 47 (0.9447 g, 3.8509 mmol) was dissolved in toluene (15 mL), and the solution was cooled to −78° C. under nitrogen. DIBAL (6.0 mL, 6.00 mmol, 1.0 M in hexanes) was added via syringe over 5 min. The solution was stirred for 1 h, and was quenched with MeOH (1.0 mL) at −78° C. The bath was removed and 5.0 mL of saturated potassium sodium tartrate solution was added. The mixture was stirred for ca. 1 h, and was filtered through Celite. The filtrate was washed with H₂O and brine, and dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, and evaporated to give compound 2 (0.8413 g, 101%) sufficiently pure for the next step.

Preparation of Compound 3b:

Compound 2 (0.8413 g, 3.8509 mmol) was dissolved in CH₂Cl₂ (5.0 mL) and (carbethoxyethylidene)triphenylphosphorane (1.8212 g, 5.0254 mmol) was added. The solution was stirred at room temp under nitrogen overnight. The solution was evaporated, and the residue was diluted with EtOAc (70 mL) and washed with H₂O (2×25 mL) and brine (25 mL), and dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, and evaporated to give an oil. Purification by Flash Chromatography on SiO₂ (FC) gave pure compound 3b (0.7863 g, 68%).

Preparation of Compound 48:

Compound 3b (0.7863 g, 2.6262 mmol) was dissolved in CH₂Cl₂ (1.0 mL) and triethylsilane (0.460 mL, 2.880 mmol) was added. Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) (2.5 mL) was added at room temp. After 30 min (complete reaction as judged by HPLC), the solution was evaporated to give a solid (1.1307 g). This solid was dissolved in CH₃CN (ca. 10 mL) and 5.5 N HCl (2.4 mL, 13.2 mmol) was added. Evaporation gave the HCl salt, compound 48 (0.618 g, 100%).

Preparation of Compound 5b:

Compound 48 (0.390 g, 1.6543 mmol), L-N-BOC-t-butylglycine (1.0106 g, 4.3694 mmol), CMC (1.9704 g, 4.6518 mmol), HOAt (0.5905 g, 4.3384 mmol), and NMM (0.490 mL, 4.4567 mmol) were combined, and DMF (4.0 mL) was added. The solution was stirred at room temp under nitrogen for 25 h. The solution was diluted with EtOAc (70 mL) and was washed with H₂O (2×25 mL), aq. pH 7.2 phosphate buffer (25 mL), H₂O (25 mL), and brine (25 mL), and dried over MgSO₄, filtered, and evaporated to give a solid which was purified by FC to give compound 5b (0.4239 g, 62%).

Preparation of Compound 49:

Compound 5b (0.1159 g, 0.2809 mmol) was dissolved in CH₂Cl₂ (3.0 mL) and triethylsilane (0.050 mL, 0.3130 mmol) was added. Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) (2.5 mL) was added at room temp. After 30 min (complete reaction as judged by HPLC), the solution was evaporated to give a solid. This solid was dissolved in CH₃CN (ca. 5 mL) and 5.5 N HCl was added (0.3 mL, 1.65 mmol). Evaporation gave the HCl salt, compound 49 (0.0662 g, 100%).

Step 2: Preparation of Compound 51:

Preparation of Compound 50:

Compound 49 (0.0774 g, 0.2219 mmol), (R)-N-methylpipecolic (0.0705 g, 0.3925 mmol), CMC (0.1752 g, 0.4136 mmol), HOAt (0.0344 g, 0.2527 mmol), and NMM (0.063 mL, 0.5730 mmol) were combined, and DMF (2.0 mL) was added. The solution was stirred at room temp under nitrogen for 20 h. The solution was purified directly by RP HPLC to give compound 50 (0.0989 g, 81%).

Preparation of Compound 51:

Compound 50 (0.0989 g, 0.2086 mmol) was dissolved in 1:1H₂O/MeOH (14 mL) at room temp. LiOH (0.0537 g, 2.2422 mmol) was added. The suspension was stirred at room temp. 19 h. The solution was acidified with 5.5 N HCl (0.50 mL), and purified by RP HPLC to give the TFA salt of 11 (0.0978 g, 90%). This was dissolved in CH3CN (ca. 5 mL) and treated with 5.5 N HCl (ca. 1 mL, 5.5 mmol) and evaporated to give the HCl salt of compound 51 (0.0667 g, 72%).

Step 2: Preparation of Compound 52:

Compound 51 (0.0062 g, 0.0139 mmol), L-proline methyl ester hydrochloride (0.0263 g, 0.1588 mmol) were dissolved in DMF (1.0 mL) at room temp. under nitrogen. DEPC (0.017 mL, 0.1120 mmol) was added via syringe. NMM (0.025 mL, 0.2274 mmol) was added via syringe. The solution was stirred overnight, quenched with H₂O (1.0 mL), and purified by RP HPLC to give the TFA salt of compound 52. This was dissolved in CH₃CN (ca. 3 mL) and treated with 5.5 N HCl (0.10 mL, 0.55 mmol) and evaporated to give the HCl salt of compound 52 (0.0078 g, 100%).

EXAMPLE 6

Preparation of Compound 62a

Preparation of Compound 54

To a solution of 4-methylpiperidine (53) (600 μL, 5.0 mmol) in MeOH (20 mL) was added Et₃N (770 μL, 5.5 mmol) followed by Boc₂O (1.2 g, 5.5 mmol) at 0° C. After 15 minutes, the reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature and allowed to stir overnight. The reaction solution was then diluted with H₂O and extracted several times with ether. The ether extracts were combined, dried over Mg₂SO₄, filtered, and concentrated to provide compound 54 (926.5 mg) quantitatively as a colorless oil.

Preparation of Compound 55

A solution of compound 54 (926.5 mg, 5.0 mmol) in Et₂O (10.5 mL) was cooled to −78° C. and treated with TMEDA (755 μL, 5.0 mmol) followed by slow addition of a 1.3 M cyclohexane solution of sec-butyllithium (4.6 mL, 6.0 mmol) over a 30 minute period. The reaction solution was then warmed to −20° C. and maintained at that temperature for 30 minutes, after which the solution was re-cooled to −78° C. and purged with gaseous carbon dioxide for 15 minutes. The reaction solution was then slowly warmed to 0° C. and poured into a biphasic mixture of 1 N HCl (100 mL) and EtOAc (50 mL). The reaction solution was then extracted several times with EtOAc. The EtOAc extracts were combined, dried over Mg₂SO₄, filtered, and concentrated to provide compound 55 (1.07 g) in 89% yield as a colorless oil (a mixture of two cis enantiomers).

Preparation of Compound 59a

To a solution of compound 55 (292 mg, 1.2 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (2.4 mL) at 0° C. was added TFA (2.4 mL). After 15 minutes, the reaction solution was warmed to r.t. and stirred for 3 hours. The reaction mixture was then concentrated in vacuo to provide compound 59a (309 mg) quantitatively as a light yellow oil.

Preparation of Compound 59b

Step 1: Preparation of Compound 56

To a solution of compound 55 (780 mg, 3.2 mmol) in DMF (6.4 mL) was added K₂CO₃ (663 mg, 4.8 mmol) followed by MeI (300 μL, 4.8 mmol). The reaction solution was allowed to stir overnight. The reaction mixture was then diluted with H₂O and extracted several times with ether. The ether extracts were combined, dried over Mg₂SO₄, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Purification of the residue by silica gel chromatography (4% EtOAc in hexanes) yielded 535 mg (65%) of compound 56 as a colorless oil.

Step 2: Preparation of Compound 57

To a solution of compound 56 (463 mg, 1.8 mmol) in MeOH (2.6 mL) was added a 25 wt % solution of NaOMe in MeOH (100 μL). The solution was allowed to stir overnight. The reaction mixture was then diluted with H₂O and extracted several times with ether. The ether extracts were combined, dried over Mg₂SO₄, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Purification of the residue by silica gel chromatography (4% EtOAc in hexanes) yielded 363.6 mg (79%) of racemic compound 57 as a colorless oil.

Step 3: Preparation of Compound 58

To a solution of compound 57 (360 mg, 1.4 mmol) in a 2:1 mixture of H₂O (2.75 mL) and EtOH (5.50 mL) was added KOH pellets (786 mg, 14 mmol) and the reaction solution was stirred at room temperature until complete by TLC. The reaction mixture was then diluted with H₂O and extracted several times with ether. The ether extracts were combined, dried over Mg₂SO₄, filtered, and concentrated to provide compound 58 (341 mg) quantitatively as a white solid.

Step 4: Preparation of Compound 59b

To a solution of compound 58 (292 mg, 1.2 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (2.4 μL) at 0° C. was added TFA (2.4 mL). After 15 minutes, the reaction solution was warmed to r.t. and stirred for 3 hours. The reaction mixture was then concentrated in vacuo to provide compound 59b (309 mg) quantitatively as a light yellow oil.

Preparation of Compounds 60a and 60b

To a solution of compound 59a (or 59b) (283 mg, 1.1 mmol) in MeOH (5 mL) was added Pd(OH)₂ (75 mg) followed by a 37 wt % solution of formaldehyde in H₂O (300 μL). Gaseous H₂ (balloon pressure) was charged in and the reaction mixture was allowed to stir under an H₂ atmosphere overnight. The reaction solution was then filtered through a bed of celite, and concentrated to provide compound 60a (or 60b) (173 mg) quantitatively as a white solid.

Preparation of Compounds 61a and 61b

To a solution of compound 60a and 60b (11.0 mg, 0.07 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (350 μL) was added HBTU (40 mg, 0.11 mmol) and DIEA (37 μL, 0.21 mmol). After 5 minutes, amine 49 (22.0 mg, 0.07 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 minutes, filtered, and concentrated. Purification of the residue by silica gel chromatography (2% EtOH in CH₂Cl₂) yielded 15.1 mg (96%) of each diastereomer 61a and 61b as colorless oils.

Preparation of Compound 62a

To a solution of diastereomer 61a (9.0 mg, 0.02 mmol) in a 2:1 mixture of H₂O (0 μL) and EtOH (160 μL) was added LiOH, H₂O (840 mg, 0.20 mmols). The reaction solution was allowed to stir overnight. The reaction mixture was then acidified with 1 N HCl until the pH=6.00. The solution was then extracted several times with CH₂Cl₂. The CH₂Cl₂ extracts were combined, dried over Mg₂SO₄, filtered, and concentrated to provide compound 62a (8.4 mg) quantitatively as a white solid.

EXAMPLE 7

Preparation of Compound 67b

Preparation of Compound 64

To a suspension of L-penicillamine (63) (300 mg, 2.0 mmol) in methanol (10 mL) was added benzaldehyde (233 mg, 2.2 mmol) followed by sodium bicarbonate (336 mg, 4.0 mmol). The mixture was heated to reflux with stirring for 16 h. After cooling to r.t., it was acidified to pH 5 with 1 N HCl and extracted with ethyl acetate three times. The organic phase was concentrated to give a yellow solid as the crude product 64 (469 mg, 99%)

Preparation of Compound 65

To a solution of crude 64 (47 mg, 0.2 mmol) in THF (1 mL) was added aq. 37% formaldehyde solution (49 μl, 0.6 mmol) followed by NaBH₄ (38 mg, 0.6 mmol). The mixture was stirred at r.t. for 24 h. After acidifying to pH 5 and extracting with ethyl acetate, the organic phase was dried and concentrated to give crude product 65 (67 mg, >100%).

Preparation of Compounds 66a and 66b

To a mixture of 65 (29 mg, 0.115 mmol), amine HCl salt 49 (15 mg, 0.043 mmol), CMC (55 mg, 0.129 mmol), and HOAt (3 mg, 0.022 mmol) was added DMF (0.5 mL) followed by NMM (6 ml, 0.055 mmol). The mixture was stirred at r.t. for 24 h. The reaction was quenched by adding water (0.5 mL) and methanol (0.5 mL). The products 66a (32%), and 66b (75%) were obtained after separation by RP HPLC (0-100% B in 30 min. A: 5% MeCN+0.15% TFA in H₂O; B: 0.15% TFA in MeCN) and lyophilization.

Preparation of Compounds 67b

To a solution of 66b (4 mg, 0.0073 mmol) in methanol (0.5 mL) was added aq. LiOH (1 M, 0.5 mL). The mixture was stirred for 16 h and acidified with 1 N HCl. Product 67b (2.79 mg, 74%) was obtained after RP HPLC purification and lyophilization.

EXAMPLE 8

Preparation of Compound 74

Preparation of Compound 69

To a solution of diethylglycine (68) (131 mg, 1.0 mmol) in 1 NNaOH (1.5 mL) was added a solution of di-t-butyl-dicarbonate (436 mg, 2.0 mmol) in dioxane (1.0 mL). The mixture was stirred for 16 h. It was acidified to pH 3 with 1 N HCl and extracted with ethyl acetate three times. The organic phases were combined, dried, and concentrated to yield crude product 69 (135 mg, 58%).

Preparation of Compound 70

To a solution of crude 69 (135 mg, 0.58 mmol) in MeOH (0.5 mL) and THF (0.5 mL) was added trimethylsilyldiazomethane (2 M in hexanes, 2.0 mmol). The solution was stirred at r.t. for 1 h. Evaporation gave crude product 70 (0.58 mmol).

Preparation of Compound 71

To a mixture of sodium hydride (160 mg 60%, 4 mmol) in DMF (1 mL) was added a solution of compound 70 (0.58 mmol) in DMF (1 mL) followed by methyl iodide (188 μl, 3 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h. Water was added to quench the reaction. The product 71 (118 mg, 78% 2 steps) was extracted with ethyl acetate and purified by flash column chromatography (silica, ethyl acetate/exanes).

Preparation of Compound 72

A solution of compound 71 (118 mg, 0.46 mmol) in conc. HCl (1 mL) was stirred at room temp. for 24 h. Product 72 was obtained after evaporation of volatiles.

Preparation of Compound 73

To a mixture of compound 72 (30 mg, 0.166 mmol), amine 49 HCl salt (39 mg, 0.166 mmol), CMC (141 mg, 0.332 mmol), and HOAt (14 mg, 0.103 mmol) was added DMF (1.5 mL) followed by NMM (6 ml, 0.128 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temp. for 24 h. The reaction was quenched by adding water (0.5 mL) and methanol (0.5 mL). Product 73 (27 mg, 34%) was obtained after separation by RP HPLC (0-100% B in 30 min. A: 5% MeCN+0.15% TFA in H₂O; B: 0.15% TFA in MeCN) and lyophilization.

Preparation of Compound 74

To a solution of compound 73 (18 mg) in methanol (0.5 mL) was added aq. LiOH (1 M, 0.5 mL). The mixture was stirred for 16 h and then acidified by 1 N HCl. Product 74 (12.3 mg, 73%) was obtained after RP HPLC purification and lyophilization.

EXAMPLE 9

Preparation of Compound 78

Preparation of Compound 76

To a solution of compound 75 (123 mg) in dry DCM (1 mL), at 0° C. under an inert atmosphere, was added a 1 M solution of DIBAL (1.6 mL) dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 2 hr then allowed to warm to 10° C. then re-cooled to 0° C. Methanol (0.22 mL) was added dropwise followed by a saturated solution of ammonium chloride (0.44 mL). DCM (20 mL) was added and the reaction mixture stirred vigorously at room temperature for 30 min. Filtration followed by concentrated in vacuo gave compound 76 (73 mg, 65%).

Preparation of Compound 77

To a solution of compound 76 (3 mg) in acetonitrile (0.6 mL) was added Dess Martin periodinane (3.1 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hr then diluted with diethyl ether (2 mL). The resultant suspension was filtered through a 0.25 μm PTFE syringe filter and concentrated in vacuo to give crude compound 77 (4 mg).

Preparation of Compound 78

To a solution of compound 77 (3 mg) in DCM (0.5 mL), at room temperature, was added ethyl carbethoxymethylidene triphenylphosphorane (21 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hr then concentrated in vacuo to dryness. Chromatographic purification gave compound 78 (1.48 mg, 44%).

EXAMPLE 10

Preparation of Compound 81

Preparation of Compound 79

To a solution of compound 7b (10 mg) in dry DCM (0.5 in mL), at 0° C. under an inert atmosphere, was added a 1 M solution of DIBAL (0.085 mL) dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1.5 hr then methanol (0.012 mL) was added dropwise followed by a saturated solution of ammonium chloride (0.024 mL). DCM (5 mL) was added and the reaction mixture stirred vigorously at room temperature for 20 min. Filtration followed by concentrated in vacuo gave crude compound 79 (9 mg, 95%).

Preparation of Compound 80

To a solution of compound 79 (5 mg) in THF (0.5 mL) was added sodium bicarbonate (3.6 mg) and Dess Martin periodinane (7.2 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hr then concentrated in vacuo to give crude compound 80.

Preparation of Compound 81

To a solution of compound 80 (4.8 mg) in ethanol (0.5 mL), at room temperature, was added hydroxylamine hydrochloride (4 mg) and sodium acetate (6 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred at 40° C. for 1.5 hr then concentrated to dryness. The residue was dissolved in DCM (0.2 mL) and treated with TFA (0.2 mL) and stood at room temperature for 10 min. Concentration in vacuo to dryness followed by chromatographic purification gave compound 81 (2.04 mg).

EXAMPLE 11

Preparation of Compound 87

Preparation of Compound 84

To a solution of compound 28 (335 mg) in THF (10 mL), at 0° C. under an inert atmosphere, was added sodium hydride (65% dispersion in mineral oil; 144 mg) portionwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 30 min then treated with methyl iodide (0.405 mL). The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred at room temperature for 3 hr. An aqueous work up followed by chromatographic purification gave compound 84 (254 mg, 72%).

Preparation of Compound 85

Compound 84 (189 mg) was treated with saturated HCl in methanol (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stood at room temperature for 2 hr then concentrated in vacuo to dryness to give compound 85 (145 mg).

Preparation of Compound 86

To a solution of compound 85 (145 mg) in DMF (3 mL), at room temperature, was added (S)—N-Boc-tert-leucine (483 mg), NMM (0.230 mL), HOAt (95 mg), and CMC (884 mg). The reaction mixture was shaken at room temperature for 16 hr. Aqueous workup followed by chromatographic purification gave an intermediate Boc compound (249 mg, 93%). The intermediate Boc compound (60 mg) was dissolved in methanol (1 mL) and treated with saturated HCl in methanol (3 mL) and stood at room temperature for 30 min. Concentration in vacuo gave compound 86 (49 mg).

Preparation of Compound 87

To a solution of compound 86 (49 mg) in DMF (0.44 mL), at room temperature, was added (S)—N-Boc-neo-phenylalanine (94 mg), NMM (34 μl), HOAt (21 mg), and CMC (130 mg). The reaction mixture was shaken at room temperature for 16 hr. Aqueous workup followed by chromatographic purification gave an intermediate Boc compound (41 mg, 47%). The intermediate Boc compound (5.5 mg) was dissolved in DCM (1 mL) and treated with TFA (1 mL). The reaction mixture was stood at room temperature for 30 min then concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The residue was dissolved in saturated HCl in methanol (1 mL) and stood at room temperature and then concentrated in vacuo to give compound 87 (4.39 mg, 89%).

EXAMPLE 12

Preparation of Compound 91

Preparation of Compound 88

To a solution of compound 28 (344 mg) in 0.5 M Hunnig's base in DCM (8 mL), at 0° C. under an inert atmosphere, was added methane sulphonyl chloride (0.207 mL) dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1.5 hr then subjected to an aqueous work up followed by chromatographic purification to give an intermediate mesylate (444 mg). The intermediate mesylate was dissolved in DMSO (2 mL) and treated with sodium azide (258 mg). The reaction mixture was heated at 40° C. for 6 hr. An aqueous work up gave compound 88 (306 mg, 82%).

Preparation of Compound 89

Compound 88 (140 mg) was dissolved in DCM (1 mL) and treated with TFA (1 mL). The reaction mixture was stood at room temperature for 30 min then concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The residue was dissolved in saturated HCl in methanol (1 mL) and stood at room temperature and then concentrated in vacuo to give compound 89 (109 mg).

Preparation of Compound 90

To a solution of compound 89 (109 mg) in DMF (2 mL), at room temperature, was added (S)-N-Boc-tert-leucine (347 mg), NMM (0.165 mL), HOAt (68 mg) and CMC (635 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hr. Aqueous workup followed by chromatographic purification gave an intermediate Boc compound (173 mg, 87%). The intermediate Boc compound (51 mg) was dissolved in methanol (1 mL) and treated with saturated HCl in methanol (3 mL) and stood at room temperature for 30 min. Concentration in vacuo gave compound 90 (43 mg).

Preparation of Compound 91

To a solution of compound 90 (42 mg) in DMF (0.37 mL), at room temperature, was added (S)-N-Boc-neo-phenylalanine (79 mg), NMM (28 μl), HOAt (17 mg), and CMC (108 mg). The reaction mixture was shaken at room temperature for 16 hr. Aqueous workup followed by chromatographic purification gave an intermediate Boc compound (88 mg). The intermediate Boc compound (88 mg) was dissolved in saturated HCl in methanol (5 mL) and stood at room temperature for 30 min and then concentrated in vacuo to give compound 91 (70 mg, 89%).

EXAMPLE 13

General Procedure for the Preparation of C-terminal Acid Compounds

To a solution of the corresponding methyl or ethyl ester (e.g., compound 7b) in a suitable mixture of methanol and tetrahydrofuran, at room temperature, was added aqueous 1 M lithium hydroxide (10-50 equivalents). The reaction mixture was stirred or shaken or stood at room temperature until the starling ester had been satisfactorily hydrolyzed. The usual workup followed by chromatographic purification gave the desired C-terminal acid compound (e.g., compound 82).

EXAMPLE 14

Preparation of Compound ER-807974

Preparation of Compound ER-807641

To a stirred solution of N-Boc-N-Me-L-Valine (200 g, 0.86 mols), N,O-demethylhydroxylamine (92.8 g, 0.95 mols, 1.1 eq) and DIEA (316.3 mL, 1.82 mol, 2.1 eq) in CH₃CN (2 L) at 0° C. was added HBTU (360.7 g, 0.95 mols, 1.1 eq) in portions. The solution was stirred at 0° C. for additional 15 min and then for 1 h at 25° C. Reaction was monitored by TLC (Hept./EtOAc 1:1) and deemed completed when no 46 was observed. The solution was concentrated by rota-vap and then diluted in TBME (1 L). The organic solution was washed with HCl (1N, 500 mL), water (250 mL), NaHCO₃ (sat. 250 mL) and brine (250 mL). The organic solution was dried over MgSO₄ (˜120 g). The solution was filtered through a silica gel bed (˜200 g) and concentrated. Crude amide ER-807641 was used without any further purification.

Preparation of Compound ER-808993

To a stirred solution of amide ER-807641 (207 g, 755 mmol, 1 eq.) in dry THF (2070 mL) at −78° C. was added a solution of LiAlH₄ (1.0M/THF, 754 mL, 755 mmol, 1.0 eq.). The solution was stirred at −78° C. for 1 h. Reaction was quenched at −78° C. by addition of reaction solution to a suspension of Na₂SO₄. 10H₂O (243 g) in TBME (1.5 L). The slurry was allowed to warm up to 15° C. and was then filtered through a Celite pad. The filtrate was concentrated, and the crude aldehyde ER-808993 was obtained as a clear oil and used without further purification. 157.9 g (97%).

Preparation of Compound ER-808995-01

Part A:

To a stirred solution of aldehyde ER-808993 (138 g, 641 mmol, 1 eq.) in dry THF (1.4 L) at 25° C. was added Ph₃P═CMeCO₂Et (256 g, 705.1 mmol, 1.1 eq.). The solution was stirred at r.t for 18 h. Reaction was not completed after that time. The solution was heated to reflux for 5 h, after which TLC showed no aldehyde remaining. The solution was cooled to room temp and heptane (1.5 L) was added. Precipitation of by-product Ph₃P═O was observed. The mixture was filtered through a silica gel (200 g) plug. The filtrate was concentrated to a minimum volume (50 mL), and the residue was dissolved in EtOAc (800 mL).

Part B:

To a stirred solution of crude ER-808994 in EtOAc (800 mL) was added MSA (80 mL). The mixture was stirred at r.t. for 45 min. (until complete by TLC). The amino-ester MSA salt was extracted from organic solution with water (2×300 mL). The aqueous layer was neutralized to pH 7-8 with sat. NaHCO₃ (300 mL). The resultant solution was extracted with EtOAc (2×400 mL), washed with brine (300 mL), dried over MgSO₄, and filtered. The EtOAc solution of the free amino-ester was bubbled with HCl (gas), and the HCl salt of ER-808995 precipitated and was collected by filtration under N₂.

Preparation of Compound ER-803921-01

To a stirred solution of ER-808995 (61.2 g, 259.6 mmol, 1 eq.), N-Boc-tBu-Gly-OH (90.1 g, 389.4 mmol, 1.5 eq) and DIEA (158 mL, 906.6 mmol, 3.5 eq) in dry DCM (612 mL) at 25° C. was added HBTU (147.7 g, 389.4 mmol, 1.5 eq.). The solution was stirred at room temp for 4 h After concentration, the solid residue was suspended in TBME (250 mL). The mixture was filtered through a silica gel bed (˜120 g), and the filtrate was washed with a solution of aq. HCl (1N, 200 mL), water (200 mL) and NaHCO₃ (sat, 200 mL). The organic layer was dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated. The N-Boc-amino-ester ER-808996 was isolated as an oil. This intermediate was re-dissolved in EtOAc (120 mL) and MSA (75 mL) was added. The solution was stirred at room temp for 1 h, at which time the reaction was deemed complete by TLC. The amino-ester MSA salt was extracted with water (2×250 mL), followed by neutralization with a solution NaOH (ca. 50%, 300 mL) to pH˜8-9. The free amine was extracted with TBME (2×30 mL). The combined organic solution was washed with water (200 mL) and brine (200 mL). After drying over MgSO₄ and filtration, HCl (g) was bubbled to obtain the hydrochloride salt of ER-803921 as a white solid collected by filtration at ca. 5° C.

Preparation of Compound ER-808998

A stirred suspension of D-pipecolic acid (100.0 g, 0.77 mol, 1 eq.) and Pd(OH)₂ (20% wt. Pd, 10 g) in a mixture MeOH/acetone (2:1 v/v, 1.5 L) was submitted to hydrogenation (H₂ 60 psi) for 24 h. Reaction was monitored by TLC (ethanol) and deemed complete when no D-pipecolic acid was observed. The mixture was filtered through a Celite (˜50 g) bed. The clear filtrate was concentrated to ca. 100 mL and TBME (50 mL) was added. ER-808998 was filtered as a white crystalline solid in 88% yield.

Preparation of Compound ER-807961

To a stirred solution of dipeptide ER-803921 (5.0 g, 16.8 mmol, 1 eq.), N-iPr-pipecolic acid ER-808998 (3.7 g, 21.8 mmols, 1.3 eq.) and HBTU (8.3 g, 21.8 mmols, 1.3 eq.) in 50 mL DCM was added DIEA (7.3 mL, 41.9 mmols, 2.5 eq.) dropwise at 25° C. The mixture was stirred for 18 h (overnight) at which time reaction was deemed complete by TLC (heptane/EtOAc 1:1). The mixture was concentrated under vacuum and TBME (50 mL) was added. The residual “thick” oil was separated from the ethereal solution by filtration through a Celite pad. The filtrate was washed with aq HCl (1M, 3×25 mL). The combined aqueous phases were neutralized with NH₄OH to pH 8-9 in the presence of EtOAc (25 mL). The aqueous layer was separated and back-extracted with TBME (25 mL). The combined organic phase was washed with brine and dried over MgSO₄, filtered, and concentrated to give tripeptide-amino-ester ER-807961 in 93% yield.

Preparation of Compound ER-807974

To a stirred solution of ester ER-807961 (5.0 g, 16.8 mmol) in 5:1 THF/H₂O (50 mL) was added LiOH (3.50 g, 83.8 mmol), and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 h. The reaction was monitored by TLC (ethanol) and deemed complete when no ER-807961 was observed. The suspension was acidified with H₂SO₄ (˜0.50 mL) to pH 7. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3×25 mL). The combined organic solution was washed with brine (20 mL), dried over MgSO₄, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was triturated with TBME: 1.8 g (83%) of thick oil free-base ER-807974 was obtained.

EXAMPLE 15

Preparation of Compound ER-808367

Preparation of Compound 2Z

To a suspension of D-pipecolic acid 1Z (750 mg, 5.81 mmol) in MeOH (23.2 mL) and 2-butanone (11.6 mL) was added Pd(OH)₂ (175 mg). Gaseous H₂ (balloon pressure) was charged in and the reaction mixture was allowed to stir under an H₂ atmosphere overnight. The reaction solution was then filtered through a bed of celite, and concentrated to give a crude white solid. The crude product was subjected to flash chromatography (SiO₂) eluting with 100% EtOH. This provided compound 2Z (721 mg, white solid) as a mixture of diastereomers in 67% yield.

Preparation of Compounds 3Z and 4Z

To a solution of 2Z (650 mg, 3.51 mmol) in DMF (8.8 mL) was added K₂CO₃ (728 mg 5.27 mmol) and p-nitrobenzylbromide (1.1 g 5.27 mmol). The reaction mixture was allowed to stir overnight. The reaction solution was diluted with water and extracted several times with diethyl ether. The ether extracts were combined, washed with water and brine. The solution was dried over MgSO₄, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture of diasteomers was then separated by flash chromatography eluting with 8% EtOAc in hexanes to give each diastereomer as a pale yellow oil. Compound 3Z (360 mg) was obtained in 32% yield with an R_(f)=0.590 (SiO₂) using 30% EtOAc in hexanes. Compound 4Z (652 mg) was obtained in 58% yield with an R_(f)=0.482 (SiO₂) using 30% EtOAc in hexanes.

Preparation of Compound ER-809439

To a solution of compound 3Z (320 mg, 1.0 mmol) in MeOH (10 mL) was added Pd(OH)₂ (50 mg). Gaseous H₂ (balloon pressure) was charged in and the reaction mixture was allowed to stir under an H₂ atmosphere for 3 hours. The reaction solution was then filtered through a bed of celite, and concentrated to provide compound ER-809439 (185 mg) as a white solid, quantitatively. Compound ER-809439, R_(f)=(SiO₂, 0.292, 100% EtOH).

Preparation of Compound ER-809447

A procedure similar to that used for the preparation of compound ER-809439 was used. Compound ER-809447, R_(f)=(SiO₂, 0.292, 100% EtOH).

Preparation of Compound ER-808357

Compound 49 (9.6 mg, 0.031 mmol), N-sec-butylpipecolic ER-809439 (5.2 mg, 0.028 mmol), HBTU (12.9 mg, 0.034 mmol), were combined. DMF (0.28 mL) was added, followed by DIEA (14.9 mL, 0.084 mmol). The solution was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for 20 h. The solution was purified directly by RP HPLC to give the TFA salt of compound ER-808357 (13.6 mg, 82%).

Preparation of Compound ER-808367

The TFA salt of compound ER-088357 (10.4 mg, 0.018 mmol) was dissolved in 1:2H₂O/EtOH (0.072 mL/0.144 mL) at room temperature. LiOH (7.5 g, 0.18 mmol) was added. The suspension was stirred at room temperature for 19 hours. The solution was purified directly by RP HPLC to give the TFA salt of compound ER-808367 (10.1 mg, quantitative).

EXAMPLE 16

Preparation of Compound ER-808368

Preparation of Compound ER-808358

A procedure similar to that used for the preparation of compound ER-808357 was used.

Preparation of Compound ER-808368

A procedure similar to that used for the preparation of compound ER-808367 was used.

EXAMPLE 17

Preparation of Compound ER-808662

Preparation of Compound 5Z

To a suspension of D-pipecolic acid 1Z (1.00 g, 7.74 mmol) in MeOH (31 mL) and 3-methyl-2-butanone (15.5 mL) was added Et₃N (1.1 mL) and Pd(OH)₂ (250 mg). Gaseous H₂ (balloon pressure) was charged in and the reaction mixture was allowed to stir under an H₂ atmosphere overnight. The reaction solution was then filtered through a bed of celite, and concentrated to give a crude white solid. The crude product was subjected to flash chromatography (SiO₂) eluting with 100% EtOH. This provided compound 5Z (377.9 mg, white solid) as a single diastereomer in 24.5% yield. R_(f)=(SiO₂, 0.280, 100% EtOH).

Preparation of Compound ER-808656

A procedure similar to that used for the preparation of compound ER-808357 was used.

Preparation of Compound ER-808662

A procedure similar to that used for the preparation of compound ER-808367 was used.

Compounds ER-809638 through ER-809650 were made according to the procedures for ER-808368 or ER-808662 with the one change: N-BOC-L-Valine was used in place of N-BOC-N-Methyl-L-Valine (46). Compounds ER-808998, ER-809439 and 5Z were used as required.

EXAMPLE 18

Preparation of Compound ER-808824

Preparation of Compound 6Z

Compound 48 (325.5 mg, 1.38 mmol), L-N-BOC-valine (300.0 mg, 1.3S mmol), HBTU (628.3 mg, 1.66 mmol), were combined. CH₂Cl₂ (7 mL) was added, followed by DIEA (0.72 mL, 4.14 mmol). The solution was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for 1 hour. The solution was concentrated in vacuo, and the crude was purified by flash chromatography (SiO₂) eluting with 4% EtOAc in hexanes. This provided compound 6Z (476.8 mg) as a colorless oil in 86.7% yield.

Preparation of Compound 7Z

Compound 6Z (450 mg, 1.13 mmol) was dissolved directly in 4N HCl/dioxane (2.8 mL). The reaction was stirred for overnight and then concentrated in vacuo to give compound 7Z (374.5 mg) as a white solid, quantitatively.

Preparation of Compound ER-808815

A procedure similar to that used for the preparation of compound ER-808357 was used.

Preparation of Compound ER-808824

A procedure similar to that used for the preparation of compound ER-808367 was used.

EXAMPLE 19 Biological Assays

In certain embodiments, compounds of the invention were tested for in vitro and in vivo activity. Screening methods included standard in vitro cell growth inhibition assays using a panel of human cancer cell lines, a U937 (ATCC accession number CRL 1593) mitotic block reversibility assay, mouse serum stability assay, MDR assay, and cytotoxicity assay. In certain other emdodiments, compounds of the invention were evaluated in tumor xenograft in vivo growth inhibition assays.

In vitro potency was determined in the MDA-MB-435 cell growth inhibition assay, and active compounds (IC₅₀<20 nM) were evaluated in the reversibility, MDR, and mouse serum stability assays. In addition, the active compounds were tested in the IMR-90 cytotoxicity assay and in additional cell growth inhibition assays in a panel of human cancer cell lines, both solid and non-solid tumors.

Cell growth inhibition assay: Cultured human cancer cells (including breast, prostate, colon, lung, leukemia, lymphoma and other) were plated in 96-well plates and grown in the continuous presence of test compounds for 72 or 96 hours. The human cell lines used in this cell growth inhibition assay, include, but are not limited to, the following solid tumor cell lines and non-solid tumor cell lines: DLD-1 colon cancer cells (ATCC accession number CCL-221), DU 145 prostate cancer cells (ATCC accession number HTB-81), H460 non small cell lung cancer, HCT-15 colon cancer cells (ATCC accession number CCL-225), HEL erythroleukemia cells, HL-60 promyelocytic leukemia cells (ATCC accession number CCL-240), K562 leukemia (ATCC accession number CCL-243), LOX melanoma, MDA-MB-435 breast cancer cells, U937 lymphoma cells (ATCC accession number CRL 1593), PANC-1 pancreatic cancer (ATCC accession number CRL-1469), HCC-2998 colon cancer (NCI-Frederick Cancer DCTD Tumor/Cell Line Repository), HCT 116 colon cancer (ATCC accession number CCL-247), HT-29 colon cancer (ATCC accession number HTB-38), LoVo colon cancer (ATCC accession number CCL-229), SW-480 colon cancer (ATCC accession number CCL-228), SW-620 colon cancer (ATCC accession number CCL-227) and COLO-205 colon cancer (ATCC accession number CCL-222). For monolayer cultures, growth was assessed using modifications (Amin et al, Cancer Res., 47: 6040-6045, 1987) of a methylene blue-based microculture assay (Finlay et al, Anal. Biochem., 139: 272-277, 19S4). Absorbances at 620 and 405 nm were measured on a Titertek Multiscan MCC/340 plate reader and absorbances at 405 nm were subtracted from absorbances at 620 nm. For suspension cultures, growth was assessed using a 3-(4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyl tetrazolium bromide-based assay (Mosmann et al, J. Immunol. Methods, 65: 55-63, 1983) modified as follows. After 4 days of incubation with test compounds, sterile-filtered 3-(4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyl tetrazolium bromide was added to each well (final concentration, 0.5 mg/ml), and plates were incubated at 37° C. for 4 h. Acid-isopropanol (0.1 N HCl in isopropanol, 150 mL) was then added to each well, and the resultant formazan crystals were dis-solved by gentle mixing. Absorbances at 540 nm were measured on a Titertek Multiscan MCC/340 plate reader.

Mitotic block reversibility assay was performed as described (See, U.S. Pat. No. 6,214,865 B1, by B. Littelfield et al, Apr. 10, 2001; which is incorporated herein be reference in its entirety).

Briefly, U937 (ATCC accession number CRP 1593) were exposed to various concentration of compounds for 12 hours. The compounds were washed away and the cells were allowed to recover for an additional 10 hours. The cells were collected by centrifugation and fixed overnight in 70% ethanol. The cells were washed in PBS, incubated with RNase A and stained with propidium iodide. Single channel flow cytometry was performed on a Becton Dickinson FACScan; the collection and analysis of data were performed using Becton Dickinson CELLQuest software. Doublet events were eliminated from analyses by proper gating on FL2-W/FL2-A primary plots before histogram analysis of DNA content (measured as FL2-A).

Determination of activity in vitro utilizing the MDR assay. This is a modification of the standard cell growth inhibition assays described above. Two cultured human cancer cell lines were used: human uterine sarcoma MDR negative MES-SA cells (ATCC accession number CRL-1976) and human uterine sarcoma MDR-positive MES-SA/Dx5 cells (ATCC accession number CRL-1977). Cells were plated in a 96-well microtiter plates at a density of 7500 cells/well. The cells were incubated in the presence or absence of test compounds for 96 hours. Cell growth was assessed using modifications (Amin et al, Cancer Res., 47: 6040-6045, 1987) of a methylene blue-based microculture assay (Finlay et al, Anal. Biochem., 139: 272-277, 1984). Absorbances at 620 and 405 nm were measured on a Titertek Multiscan MCC/340 plate reader and absorbances at 405 nm were subtracted from absorbances at 620 nm. The ratio of the concentrations of the compounds inhibiting the growth of cells by 50% was calculated and used to estimate the sensitivity of the compounds to MDR (multidrug-resistance, or P-glycoprotein-mediated drug efflux). In some cases, a different pair of cell lines was used: MDR-negative murine leukemia cells P388/S, and MDR-positive murine leukemia cells P38S/VMDRC.04. Cells were plated in a 96-well microtiter plates at a density of 4000 cells/well. The cells were incubated in the presence or absence of test compounds for 72 hours. Cell growth was assessed using a 3-(4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyl tetrazolium bromide-based assay (Mosmann et al, J. Immunol. Methods, 65: 55-63, 1983) modified as follows. After 3 days of incubation with test compounds, sterile-filtered 3-(4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyl tetrazolium bromide was added to each well (final concentration, 0.5 mg/ml), and plates were incubated at 37° C. for 4 h. Acid-isopropanol (0.1 N HCl in isopropanol, 150 mL) was then added to each well, and the resultant formazan crystals were dis-solved by gentle mixing. Absorbances at 540 nm were measured on a Titertek Multiscan MCC/340 plate reader.

Stability to esterase degradation was determined in the mouse serum stability assays. The enzymatic activity of mouse serum can result in inactivation of compounds in vivo despite their promising in vitro activity. A modification of the standard cell growth inhibition assays described above was used to determine stability of the test compounds to esterase degradation. Human breast carcinoma cell line MDA-MB-435 or human prostate carcinoma cell line DU 145 were used. The cells were plated in a 96-well microtiter plates at a density of 7500 cells/well. Prior to adding the test compounds to cells in the cell growth inhibition assay, the test compounds were incubated in 100% mouse serum or normal growth medium for 6 hours at 37° C. After that, the test compounds were added to the 96-well microtiter plates containing the cells. The cells were incubated in the presence or absence of test compounds for 96 hours. Cell growth was assessed using modifications (Amin et al, Cancer Res., 47: 6040-6045, 1987) of a methylene blue-based microculture assay (Finlay et al, Anal. Biochem., 139: 272-277, 1984). Absorbances at 620 and 405 nm were measured on a Titertek Multiscan MCC/340. Ability of test compounds to inhibit cell growth after compounds' exposure to mouse serum esterases was assessed.

Cytotoxicity assay. To determine toxicity of compounds against normal, non-dividing cells, quiescent IMR-90 normal human fibroblasts (ATCC accession number CCL-186) were used. IMR-90 cells were plated in a 96-well microtiter plate format and grown to confluency (for 72 hours). After the 72-hour growth, the cells were washed and the medium was replaced from normal medium containing 10% fetal bovine serum to medium containing low concentration of serum (0.1%). Cells were made quiescent by incubation in 0.1% serum-containing growth medium for additional 72 hours. Cells were incubated with the test compounds for 24 hours. Cellular ATP levels were measured using a ViaLight HS kit (LumiTech Ltd). A cytotoxic compound carbonyl cyanide was used in all assays as a positive control for cytotoxicity.

Determination of antitumor activity in vivo in mice. In vivo tumor xenograft studies were performed in immunocompromised (nude) mice. Mice (female Ncr athymic) were implanted subcutaneously with human tumor xenografts (including breast MDA-MB-435, colon COLO-205, HCT-15, HCT-116, HCC-2998, HT-29. SW-620, DLD-1, LoVo, melanoma LOX, lung H522, pancreatic PANC-1). After the xenografts reached an average size of 75-200 mm³ or 400-600 mm³, the animals were weighed and randomly divided into groups of 8-10 on the first day of compound administration. Test compounds were administered intravenously or intraperitoneally. Tumor and body weight measurements were done twice weekly. 

1. A compound having the structure (I):

or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof; wherein n is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; X₁ and X₂ are each independently CR_(A)R_(B), C(═O), or —SO₂—; wherein each occurrence of R_(A) and R_(B) is independently hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(C) or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein each occurrence of R_(C) is independently hydrogen, OH, OR_(D), or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R_(D) is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; each occurrence of R₃ and R₄ is independently hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or wherein any two R₁, R₂, R₃ and R₄ groups, taken together, may form an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, alicyclicc(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl) or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; R₅, R₆ and R₇ are each independently hydrogen, —(C═O)RE or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, wherein each occurrence of R_(E) is independently hydrogen, OH, OR_(F), or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or wherein any two R₅, R₆ and R₇ groups, taken together, form an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, alicyclic(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl) or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein RF is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or R₇ may be absent when NR₇ is linked to R via a double bond; R is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q′), NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), N₃, ═N—OH, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are each independently hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, may form an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, alicyclic(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl) or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; with the proviso that: (i) the compound is not a naturally occurring Hemiasterlin; and (ii) the following groups do not occur simultaneously as defined: n is 1; X₁ and X₂ are each C(═O); R₁ is hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl or acyl group, or an optionally substituted methylene or —CH═ group bonded to the indole moiety thereby forming a tricyclic moiety; R₂ is hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl or acyl group, or is absent when R₁ is —CH═ as defined above; R₃ is hydrogen or is absent when CR₃ and CR_(y)R_(z), as defined herein, are linked by a double bond; R₄ is a moiety having the structure:

 wherein R_(w), R_(y) and R_(z) are each independently hydrogen, or optionally substituted alkyl or acyl, or R_(z) is absent when CR₃ and CR_(y)R_(z), as defined herein, are linked by a double bond; with the limitation that R_(y) and R_(z) are not simultaneously hydrogen; R_(x) is hydrogen or an optional substituent, or is absent when R₁ is an optionally substituted methylene or —CH═ group as defined above; Y is an optional substituent; and m is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; R₅ is hydrogen, OH or an optionally substituted alkyl or acyl group; R₆ is hydrogen or an optionally substituted alkyl group; R₇ is hydrogen or alkyl; and —R—X₂-Q together represent an optionally substituted alkyl moiety or -Q′-C(O)X, wherein Q′ is an optionally substituted —CH₂—, —CH₂CH₂—, —CH₂CH₂CH₂—, —CH₂CH═CH—, —CH₂C≡C— or phenylene moiety, wherein X is —OR′, —SR′ or —NR′R″ and each occurrence of R′ and R″ is independently hydrogen or optionally substituted alkyl.
 2. The compound of claim 1 wherein the compound does not comprise more than four consecutive α-amino acid residues; and wherein one or more of the following groups do not occur simultaneously as defined: (a) n is 1; X₁ and X₂ are each C(═O); R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, Ar-aliphatic-, Ar-alicyclic-; and, where at least one of R₁ and R₂ is aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, Ar-aliphatic-, Ar-alicyclic- and neither are Ar, Ar-aliphatic- or Ar-alicyclic-, R₁ and R₂, taken together, may form a three- to seven-membered ring; wherein Ar is defined as substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, naphtyl, anthracyl, phenanthryl, furyl, pyrrolyl, thiophenyl, benzofuryl, benzothiophenyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl or pyridyl; R₃ is hydrogen; R₄ is —CR_(4a)R_(4b)R_(4c) wherein R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each independently hydrogen, aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, Ar-aliphatic-, Ar-alicyclic-; and, where at least one of R_(4a) and R_(4b) is aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, Ar-aliphatic-, Ar-alicyclic- and neither are Ar, Ar-aliphatic- or Ar-alicyclic-, R_(4a) and R_(4b), taken together, may form a three- to seven-membered ring; and R_(4c) is hydrogen, aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, Ar-aliphatic-, Ar-alicyclic- and Ar; wherein Ar is as defined directly above; R₅, R₆ and R₇ are each independently hydrogen, aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, Ar-aliphatic-, Ar-alicyclic- and Ar; R is a moiety selected from the group consisting of: a linear, saturated or unsaturated, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group containing one to six carbon atoms; and Q is —OR_(G), —SR_(G), —NR_(G)R_(H), —NHCH(R_(K))CO₂H, or —NRCH(R_(K))CO₂H, wherein R_(G) and R_(H) are each independently hydrogen, aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic or heteroalicyclic; R_(K) is aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, or a moiety having the structure —(CH₂)_(t)NR_(K1)R_(K2), wherein t=1-4 and R_(K1) and R_(K2) are independently hydrogen, aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic or —C(NH)(NH₂); (b) n is 1; X₁ and X₂ are each C(═O); R₁ is an optionally substituted methylene or —CH═ group bonded to the indole moiety thereby forming a tricyclic moiety; R₂ is hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl or acyl group, or is absent when R₁ is —CH═ as defined above; R₃ is hydrogen or is absent when CR₃ and CR_(y)R_(z), as defined herein, are linked by a double bond; R₄ is a moiety having the structure:

wherein R_(w), R_(y) and R_(z) are each independently hydrogen, or optionally substituted alkyl or acyl, or R_(z) is absent when CR₃ and CR_(y)R_(z), as defined herein, are linked by a double bond; R_(x) is hydrogen or an optional substituent, or is absent when R₁ is an optionally substituted methylene or —CH═ group as defined above; Y is an optional substituent; and m is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; R₅ is hydrogen, OH or an optionally substituted alkyl or acyl group; R₆ is hydrogen or an optionally substituted alkyl group; R₇ is hydrogen or alkyl; and —R—X₂-Q together represent an optionally substituted alkyl moiety; (c) n is 1; X₁ is C═O; R₁ is methyl; R₂ and R₃, taken together, form a piperidine moiety; R₄ and R₅ are each hydrogen, R₆ is —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃; R₇ is —CH₂C(═O)CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —CH₂C(═O)CH₂CH₂CH₃ or CH₂C(═O)CH₂CH₃; and —R—X₂-Q together represent the moiety having the structure:

(d) n is 1; X₁ is C═O; R₁, R₂, and R₇ are each methyl; R₃ and R₅ are each hydrogen; R₄ and R₆ are each i-propyl; and —R—X₂-Q together represent the moiety having the structure:

wherein Rx is hydrogen or 2-thiazolyl; and/or (e) n is 1; X₁ is C═O; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen or C₁₋₄alkyl; R₃ and R₅ are each hydrogen; R₄ and R₆ are each i-propyl; R₇ is methyl; and —R—X₂-Q together represent a moiety having the structure:

 wherein v is 0, 1 or 2; R′ is hydrogen or C₁₋₄alkyl; R″ is C₁₋₆alkylamino; hydroxy; C₃₋₇cycloalkylamino optionally substituted by phenyl or benzyl; arylamino; C₁₋₄alkoxy; benzhydrazino; heterocyclyl optionally substituted with one to three substituents selected from the group consisting of benzyl, benzhydryl, alkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylcarbamoyloxy, amino, mono- or di-alkylamino, acylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, phenyl or halogen; heterocyclylamino; heterocycloalkylamino with the heterocyclyc group optionally substituted with one to three substituents selected from the group consisting of benzyl, benzhydryl, alkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylcarbamoyloxy, amino, di-alkylamino, acylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino or halogen; aralkyloxy or aralkyl both optionally substituted with one to three substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, alkoxyxarbonyl, sulfamoyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, cyano, mono- or di-alkylamino, alkyl, alkoxy, phenyl, phenoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkylthio, hydroxy, alkoxycarbonylamino, heterocyclyl, 1,3-dioxolyl, 1,4-dioxolyl, amino, aminosulfonyl or benzyl; or aralkylamino having C₁₋₄alkylene and the aryl group optionally substituted with one to three substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, alkoxyxarbonyl, sulfamoyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, carbamoyloxy, cyano, mono- or di-alkylamino, alkyl, alkoxy, phenyl, phenoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkylthio, hydroxy, alkoxycarbonylamino, heterocyclyl, 1,3-dioxolyl, 1,4-dioxolyl, amino or benzyl; and R′″ is hydrogen, alkyl optionally substituted with one to three substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, mono- or di-alkylamino, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, carbamoyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, carbamoyloxy or halogen; alkenyl; alkynyl; C₃₋₇cycloalkyl; aryl optionally substituted with one to three substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, alkoxyxarbonyl, sulfamoyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, cyano, mono- or di-alkylamino, alkyl, alkoxy, phenyl, phenoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkylthio, hydroxy, alkoxycarbonylamino, heterocyclyl, 1,3-dioxolyl, 1,4-dioxolyl, amino or benzyl; aralkyl with the aryl group optionally substituted with one to three substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, alkoxyxarbonyl, carbamoyl, sulfamoyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, cyano, mono- or di-alkylamino, alkyl, alkoxy, phenyl, phenoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkylthio, hydroxy, alkoxycarbonylamino, heterocyclyl, 1,3-dioxolyl, 1,4-dioxolyl, amino or benzyl; or heterocyclylalkyl; wherein the groups recited in paragraph (e) above are defined as follows: alkyl refers to a straight-chain or branched-chain hydrocarbon group optionally substituted with hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, mono- or di-alkylamino, acetoxy, alkylcarbonyloxy, alkoxycarbonyl, carbamoyloxy, carbamoyl or halogen; alkenyl refers to a hydrocarbon chain as defined for alkyl above having at least one double bond; alkynyl refers to a hydrocarbon chain as defined for alkyl above having at least one triple bond; C₃₋₇cycloalkyl refers to a saturated, cyclic hydrocarbon group with 3-7 carbon atoms optionally substituted with alkyl, phenyl, amino, hydroxy or halogen; C₁₋₄alkylene refers to a biradical linear or branched hydrocarbon chain containing 1-4 carbon atoms; Aralkyl, refers to an aryl group attached to an alkylene group; Heterocyclyl refers to saturated, unsaturated or aromatic monovalent cyclic radical having one to three heteroatoms selected from O, N and S, or combination thereof, optionally substituted with one or more occurrences of benzyl, benzhydryl, alkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylcarbamoyloxy, amino, mono- or di-alkylamino, acylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino or halogen; Amino refers to —NH₂ and includes amino groups which are further substituted by lower alkyl groups, or nitrogen protecting groups know in the art; Cycloalkylamino refers to cycloalkyl groups as defined above attached to a structure via an amino radical; Arylamino is defined as aryl-NH—; Aralkylamino is defined as aralkyl-NH—; Carbamoyl refers to the group —C(═O)—NH₂; Carbamoyloxy refers to the group —O—C(═O)—NH—; Alkylcarbamoyloxy refers to the group —O—C(═O)—NH-alkyl; Alkylcarbonyloxy refers to the group —O—C(═O)-alkyl; Aralkyloxy refers to the group —O-aralkyl; and Alkylthio refers to the group Alkyl-S—.
 3. The compound of claim 1 having the limitation that the following groups do not occur simultaneously as defined: n is 1; X₁ and X₂ are each C(═O); R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, n-butyl, acetyl; or R₁ and R₂, taken together, form a moiety selected from the group consisting of cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, and cyclohexyl; R₃ is hydrogen; R₄ is —CR_(4a)R_(4b)R_(4c) wherein R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each independently methyl, ethyl, n-propyl or n-butyl; or R_(4a) and R_(4b), taken together, form a moiety selected from the group consisting of β-cyclopropyl, β-cyclobutyl, β-cyclopentyl, and β-cyclcohexyl; and R_(4c) is phenyl, naphtyl, anthracyl or pyrrolyl; R₅ and R₇ are each independently hydrogen or methyl; R₆ is a three to six carbon, branched alkyl group; and —R—X₂-Q together represent the moiety having the structure:

wherein R′ is methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, iso-butyl, or sec-butyl; R″ is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl or sec-butyl; and Q is OH or OR_(G) wherein R_(G) is a linear or branched one to six carbon alkyl group.
 4. The compound of claim 1 having the limitation that the following groups do not occur simultaneously as defined: n is 1; X₁ and X₂ are each C(═O); R₁, R₃ and R₅ are each hydrogen; R₂ is methyl; R₄ is —CR_(4a)R_(4b)R_(4c), R₆ is tert-butyl; and —R—X₂-Q together represent the moiety having the structure:

wherein R′ is isopropyl; R″ is methyl; and Q is OH; and (a) R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each methyl; R_(4c) is methyl or phenyl; and R₇ is hydrogen or methyl; (b) R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each methyl; R_(4c) is hydrogen; and R₇ is methyl; or (c) R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each hydrogen; R_(4c) is phenyl; and R₇ is methyl.
 5. The compound of claim 1 wherein R is —CH(R_(8a))C(R_(9a))═C(R_(10a))— and the compound has the following structure:

wherein R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) are each independently hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and wherein any two R₇, R_(8a), R_(9a) and R_(10a) groups may form an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, alicyclicc(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl) or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety.
 6. The compound of claim 5 having the following stereochemistry:


7. The compound of claim 5 wherein R₅ and R_(9a) are each hydrogen, and R₆, R₇, R_(8a) and R_(10a) are each independently alkyl, whereby the alkyl moiety may be substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic.
 8. The compound of claim 6 wherein R₆ is tert-butyl, R₇ and R_(10a) are each methyl and R_(8a) is iso-propyl.
 9. The compound of claim 5 wherein X₂ is C═O and the compound has the following structure:

wherein X₁ is C═O, SO₂, or CR_(A)R_(B), wherein R_(A) and R_(B) are each independently hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety.
 10. The compound of claim 9 having the following stereochemistry:


11. The compound of claim 9 wherein R_(A) and R_(B) are each hydrogen.
 12. The compound of claim 5 wherein X₁ is C═O and the compound has the following structure:

wherein X₂ is C═O, SO₂, or CR_(A)R_(B), wherein R_(A) and R_(B) are each independently hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety.
 13. The compound of claim 12 having the following stereochemistry:


14. The compound of claim 12 wherein R_(A) and R_(B) are each hydrogen.
 15. The compound of claim 9 wherein X₁ is C═O; Q is an optionally substituted nitrogen-containing cyclic moiety; and the compound has the following structure:

wherein each occurrence of A, B, D or E is independently CHR^(i), CR^(i)R^(ii), O, S, NR^(i)R^(ii), wherein each occurrence of R_(i) and R^(ii) is independently absent, hydrogen, —C(═O)R^(iii), or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or wherein any two adjacent R^(i), R^(ii) or R^(iii) groups, taken together, form a alicyclic or heteroalicyclic moiety containing 3-6 atoms or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein each occurrence of R^(iii) is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; N and A, A and B, B and D, D and E, and E and N are each independently linked by a single or double bond as valency permits; and a, b, d and e are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7, wherein the sum of a, b, d and e is 4-7.
 16. The compound of claim 15 having the following stereochemistry:


17. The compound of claim 15 wherein n is 1; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen or lower alkyl; and R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl) or acyl.
 18. The compound of claim 15 wherein R₅ and R_(9a) are each hydrogen, and R₆, R₇, R_(8a) and R_(10a) are each independently alkyl, whereby the alkyl moiety may be substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated.
 19. The compound of claim 18 wherein R₆ is tert-butyl, R₇ and R_(10a) are each methyl and R_(8a) is iso-propyl.
 20. The compound of claim 15 wherein a, b, d and e are each 1; B and D are each CH₂; and A and E are each independently CH₂, CHR^(i), CHOR_(i), CHNR^(i)R^(ii), CH(C═O)R^(i), CH(C═O)OR^(i), or CH(C═O)NR^(i)R^(ii); wherein each occurrence of R^(i) and R^(ii) is independently hydrogen, alkyl or heteroalkyl; whereby the alkyl and heteroalkyl moieties may be substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated.
 21. The compound of claim 15 wherein n is 1; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen or methyl; R₃ is hydrogen and R₄ is —CR_(4a)R_(4b)R_(4c); and the compound has the structure:

wherein R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each independently hydrogen or lower alkyl and R_(4c) is an aryl or heteroaryl moiety.
 22. The compound of claim 21 wherein R_(4c) is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl.
 23. The compound of claim 21 wherein R₅ and R_(9a) are each hydrogen, and R₆, R₇, R_(8a) and R_(10a) are each independently alkyl, whereby the alkyl moiety may be substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated.
 24. The compound of claim 23 wherein R₆ is tert-butyl, R₇ and R_(10a) are each methyl and R_(9a) is iso-propyl.
 25. The compound of claim 21 wherein a, b, d and e are each 1; B and D are each CH₂; and A and E are each independently CH₂, CHR^(i), CHOR^(i), CHNR^(i)R^(ii), CH(C═O)R^(i), CH(C═O)OR^(i), or CH(C═O)NR^(i)R^(ii); wherein each occurrence of R^(i) and R^(ii) is independently hydrogen, alkyl or heteroalkyl; whereby the alkyl and heteroalkyl moieties may be substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated.
 26. The compound of claim 1 wherein X₂ is C═O and R is a heteroaliphatic moiety containing 1-10 carbon atoms, 1 to 4 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 4 oxygen atoms and 0 to 4 sulfur atoms, whereby the heteroaliphatic moiety may be saturated or unsaturated, substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, or cyclic or acyclic.
 27. The compound of claim 26 wherein R is —C(R_(8b))C(R_(9b))N(R_(10b))C(R_(11b))—; and the compound has the following structure:

wherein R_(8b), R_(9b), R_(10b) and R_(11b) are each independently absent, hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(L) or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, wherein each occurrence of R_(L) is independently hydrogen, OH, OR_(M), or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or wherein any two R_(9b), R_(9b), R_(10b) and R_(11b) groups, taken together, form a alicyclic or heteroalicyclic moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R_(M) is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and NR₇ and CR_(9b), CR_(8b) and CR_(9b), CR_(9b) and CR_(10b), CR_(10b) and CR_(11b) are each independently linked by a single or double bond as valency permits.
 28. The compound of claim 27 having the following stereochemistry:


29. The compound of claim 27 wherein n is 1; X₁ is C═O; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen or lower alkyl; and R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, -alkyl(aryl) or acyl.
 30. The compound of claim 27 wherein R₅, R_(9b) and R_(11b) are each hydrogen, and R₆, R₇, R_(8b) and R_(10b) are each independently lower alkyl or acyl, whereby the alkyl and acyl moiety may be substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated.
 31. The compound of claim 30 wherein R₆ is tert-butyl, R₇ is methyl, R_(8b) is iso-propyl, and R_(10b) is methyl or acetyl.
 32. The compound of claim 27 wherein Q is OR^(Q′) or NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -alkyl(aryl) or -heteroalkyl(aryl), or wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a heterocyclic moiety.
 33. The compound of claim 27 wherein R_(10b) and R_(11b), taken together, form a substituted or unsubstituted cyclic heteroalkyl moiety, and the compound has the structure:

wherein p is 1, 2, 3 or 4; q is 0-12; and each occurrence of S₁ is independently an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or any two adjacent S₁ moieties, taken together, may form an an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety.
 34. The compound of claim 33 wherein p is 1 and q is
 0. 35. The compound of claim 33 having the following sterochemistry:


36. The compound of claim 33 wherein n is 1; X₁ is C═O; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen or lower alkyl; and R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl or -alkyl(aryl).
 37. The compound of claim 33 wherein R₅ and R_(9b) are each hydrogen, and R₆, R₇ and R_(8b) are each independently alkyl, whereby the alkyl moiety may be substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated.
 38. The compound of claim 37 wherein R₆ is tert-butyl, R₇ is methyl and R_(8b) is iso-propyl.
 39. The compound of claim 33 wherein Q is OR^(Q′) or NRQ^(′)R^(Q″), wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -alkylaryl or -heteroalkylaryl, or wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a heterocyclic moiety.
 40. The compound of claim 27 wherein n is 1; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen or methyl; R₃ is hydrogen and R₄ is —CF_(4a)R_(4b)R_(4c); and the compound has the following structure:

wherein R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each independently lower alkyl and R_(4c) is an aryl or heteroaryl moiety.
 41. The compound of claim 40 wherein R_(4c) is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl.
 42. The compound of claim 40 wherein the compound has the following structure:


43. The compound of claim 40 wherein X₁ is C═O; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen or lower alkyl; and R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl or -alkyl(aryl).
 44. The compound of claim 40 wherein R₅, R_(9b) and R_(11b) are each hydrogen, and R₅, R₇, R_(8b) and R_(10b) are each independently lower alkyl or acyl, whereby the alkyl and acyl moiety may be substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated.
 45. The compound of claim 44 wherein R₆ is tert-butyl, R₇ is methyl, R_(8b) is iso-propyl, and R_(10b) is methyl or acetyl.
 46. The compound of claim 40 wherein Q is OR^(Q′) or NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -alkylaryl or -heteroalkylaryl, or wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a heterocyclic moiety.
 47. The compound of claim 40 wherein R_(10b) and R_(11b), taken together, form a substituted or unsubstituted cyclic heteroalkyl moiety, and the compound has the structure:

wherein p is 1, 2, 3 or 4; q is 0-12; and each occurrence of S₁ is independently an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or any two adjacent S₁ moieties, taken together, may form an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety.
 48. The compound of claim 47 wherein p is 1 and q is
 0. 49. The compound of claim 47 having the following sterochemistry:


50. The compound of claim 47 wherein X₁ is C═O; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen or lower alkyl; and R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl or -alkyl(aryl).
 51. The compound of claim 47 wherein R₅ and R_(9b) are each hydrogen, and R₆, R₇ and R_(8b) are each independently alkyl, whereby the alkyl moiety may be substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated.
 52. The compound of claim 51 wherein R₆ is tert-butyl, R₇ is methyl and R_(8b) is iso-propyl.
 53. The compound of claim 47 wherein Q is OR^(Q′) or NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -alkyl(aryl) or -heteroalkyl(aryl), or wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a heterocyclic moiety.
 54. The compound of claim 26 wherein the compound has the following structure:

wherein R_(8c), R_(9c), R_(10c), R_(11c) and R_(12c) are each independently hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(L) or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, wherein each occurrence of R_(L) is independently hydrogen, OH, OR_(M), or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or wherein any two R_(8c), R_(9c), R_(10c), R_(11c) and R_(12c) groups, taken together, form a alicyclic or heteroalicyclic moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R_(M) is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and NR₇ and CR_(8c), CR_(8c) and CR_(9c), CR_(9c) and CR_(10c), and CR_(10c) and CR_(11c) are each independently linked by a single or double bond as valency permits.
 55. The compound of claim 54 having the following structure:


56. The compound of claim 54 wherein n is 1; X₁ is C═O; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen or lower alkyl; and R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl or -alkyl(aryl).
 57. The compound of claim 54 wherein R₅, R_(9c), R_(11c) and R_(12c) are each hydrogen, and R₆, R₇, R_(8c) and R_(10c) are each independently alkyl, whereby the alkyl moiety may be substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated.
 58. The compound of claim 57 wherein R₆ is tert-butyl, R₇ and R_(10c) are each methyl and R_(8c) is iso-propyl.
 59. The compound of claim 54 wherein Q is OR^(Q′) or NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -alkyl(aryl) or -heteroalkyl(aryl), or wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a heterocyclic moiety.
 60. The compound of claim 54 wherein n is 1; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen or methyl; R₃ is hydrogen; and R₄ is CR_(4a)R_(4b)R_(4c); and the compound has the structure:

wherein R_(4a) and R_(4b) are each independently lower alkyl and R_(4c) is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl moiety.
 61. The compound of claim 60 wherein R_(4c) is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl
 62. The compound of claim 60 wherein the compound has the following structure:


63. The compound of claim 60 wherein X₁ is C═O; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen or lower alkyl; and R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl or -alkyl(aryl).
 64. The compound of claim 60 wherein R₅, R_(9c), R_(11c) and R_(12c) are each hydrogen; and R₆, R₇, R_(8c) and R_(10c) are each independently alkyl; whereby the alkyl moiety may be substituted or unsubstituted, linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic, or saturated or unsaturated.
 65. The compound of claim 64 wherein R₆ is tert-butyl, R₇ and R_(10c) are each methyl and R_(8c) is iso-propyl.
 66. The compound of claim 60 wherein Q is OR^(Q′) or NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -alkyl(aryl) or -heteroalkyl(aryl), or wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a heterocyclic moiety.
 67. The compound any one of claims 1, 10, 28, 35 and 55, wherein X₁ is C═O, n is 1, R₁ and R₄, taken together, form a cyclic heterocyclic or heteroaryl moiety, R₃ is hydrogen or is absent when the carbon atom bearing R₃ is linked to N or M via a double bond, and the moiety —X₁—(CR₃R₄)_(n)NR₁R₂ has the following structure:

wherein each occurrence of G, J, L and M is independently CHR^(iv), CR^(iv)R^(v), O, S, NR^(iv)R^(v), wherein each occurrence of R^(iv) and R^(v) is independently absent, hydrogen, —C(═O)R^(vi), or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or wherein any two adjacent R₂, R^(iv), R^(v) or R^(vi) groups, taken together, form a alicyclic or heteroalicyclic moiety containing 3-6 atoms or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein each occurrence of R^(vi) is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; N and G, G and J, J and L, L and M, M and CR₃, and CR₃ and N are each independently linked by a single or double bond as valency permits; and g, j, l and m are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, wherein the sum of g, j, 1 and m is 3-6.
 68. The compound of claim 67 wherein j is 0; 1 and m are each 1; R₃ is hydrogen; G is CR_(G1); M is CR_(M1)R_(M2), and the moiety —X₁—(CR₃R₄)_(n)NR₁R₂ has the following structure:

wherein g is 1, 2, 3 or 4; L is CR_(L1)R_(L2), S, O or NR_(L3), wherein each occurrence of R_(L1), R_(L2) and R_(L3) is independently hydrogen or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; each occurrence of R_(G1), R_(M1) and R_(M2) is each independently hydrogen or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and wherein any two adjacent R_(L1), R_(L2), R_(L3), R_(G1), R_(M1) or R_(M2) groups, taken together, form a substituted or unsubstituted alicyclic or heteroalicyclic moiety containing 3-6 atoms or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety.
 69. The compound of claim 68 wherein R₂ is hydrogen, lower alkyl or acyl; R_(G1) is hydrogen, lower alkyl or phenyl; and R_(M1) and R_(M2) are each independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, phenyl or R_(M2) is absent when R_(M1), taken together with a substituent on L, forms an aryl or heteroaryl moiety.
 70. The compound of claim 67 wherein G, J and M are each CH₂; j, l and m are each 1; and the moiety —X₁—(CR₃R₄)_(n)NR₁R₂ has the following structure:

wherein R_(L1) and R_(L2) are each independently hydrogen or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety.
 71. The compound of claim 70 wherein R₂ is hydrogen, lower alkyl or acyl; R_(L1) and R_(L2) are each independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl.
 72. The compound of claim 70 wherein R is —CH(R_(8a))C(R_(9a))═C(R_(10a))—; R₂ is methyl, R₅ is hydrogen, R₆ is tert-butyl, R₇ is methyl, R_(8a) is iso-propyl, and Q is OR^(Q′) or NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are each independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl, or wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a heterocyclic or heteroaryl moiety.
 73. The compound any one of claims 1, 10, 28, 35 and 55, wherein X₁ is C═O, n is 1, R₃ and R₄ are each independently an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or, when taken together, form an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, alicyclic(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl), heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety


74. The compound of claim 73 wherein R₄ and R₅ are each independently lower alkyl, or, when taken together, form a cyclic alkyl or -alkyl(aryl) moiety.
 75. The compound of claim 74 wherein R₃ and R₄ are each ethyl.
 76. The compound of claim 73 wherein Q is OR^(Q′) or NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -alkyl(aryl) or -heteroalkyl(aryl), or wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a heterocyclic moiety.
 77. The compound of claim 1 having the structure:


78. The compound of claim 1 having the structure:


79. The compound of claim 1 having the structure:

wherein Q is OH or Et.
 80. The compound of claim 1 having the structure:


81. The compound of claim 1 having the structure:


82. The compound of claim 1 having the structure:


83. The compound of claim 1 having the structure:

wherein S₁ is H, —CH₂OMe, —C(═O)OMe or —C(═O)NH₂.
 84. The compound of claim 1 having the structure:


85. The compound of claim 1 having the structure:


86. The compound of claim 1 having the structure:


87. The compound of claim 1 having the structure:


88. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of claim 1, a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent, and optionally further comprising an additional therapeutic agent.
 89. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 88 wherein the compound is present in an amount effective to inhibit cancer cell growth in vitro.
 90. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 88 wherein the compound is present in an amount effective to cause tumor regression in vivo.
 91. A method for treating cancer comprising: administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of claim 1, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent, and optionally an additional therapeutic agent.
 92. The method of claim 91, wherein the method is used to treat prostate, breast, colon, bladder, cervical, skin, testicular, kidney, ovarian, stomach, brain, liver, pancreatic or esophageal cancer or lymphoma, leukemia, or multiple myeloma.
 93. The method of claim 92, wherein the cancer is a solid tumor.
 94. The method of claim 92, wherein the cancer is a non-solid tumor.
 95. A method for preventing or reducing the rate of restenosis, comprising: inserting a stent into an obstructed blood vessel, the stent having a generally tubular structure, the surface of the structure being coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) a composition comprising a compound having the structure:

or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof; wherein n is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; X₁ and X₂ are each independently CR_(A)R_(B), C(═O), or —SO₂—; wherein each occurrence of R_(A) and R_(B) is independently hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(C) or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein each occurrence of R_(C) is independently hydrogen, OH, OR_(D), or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R_(D) is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; each occurrence of R₃ and R₄ is independently hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or wherein any two R₁, R₂, R₃ and R₄ groups, taken together, may form an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, alicyclicc(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl) or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; R₅, R₆ and R₇ are each independently hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(E) or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, wherein each occurrence of R_(E) is independently hydrogen, OH, OR_(F), or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or wherein any two R₅, R₆ and R₇ groups, taken together, form an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, alicyclic(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl) or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R_(F) is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or wherein R₇ may be absent when NR₇ is linked to R via a double bond; R is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q″), NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), N₃, ═N—OH, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are each independently hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, may form an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, alicyclicc(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl) or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and optionally a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent; such that the obstruction is eliminated and the composition is delivered in amounts effective to prevent or reduce the rate of restenosis.
 96. A method for expanding the lumen of a body passageway, comprising: inserting a stent into the passageway, the stent having a generally tubular structure, the surface of the structure being coated with (or otherwise adapted to release) a composition comprising a compound having the structure:

or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof; wherein n is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; X₁ and X₂ are each independently CR_(A)R_(B), C(═O), or —SO₂—; wherein each occurrence of R_(A) and R_(B) is independently hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(C) or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein each occurrence of R_(C) is independently hydrogen, OH, OR_(D), or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R_(D) is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; each occurrence of R₃ and R₄ is independently hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or wherein any two R₁, R₂, R₃ and R₄ groups, taken together, may form an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, alicyclicc(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl) or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; R₅, R₆ and R₇ are each independently hydrogen, —(C═O)R_(E) or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, wherein each occurrence of R_(E) is independently hydrogen, OH, OR_(F), or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or wherein any two R₅, R₆ and R₇ groups, taken together, form an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, alicyclic(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl) or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R_(F) is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; or wherein R₇ may be absent when NR₇ is linked to R via a double bond; R is an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and Q is OR^(Q′), SR^(Q′), NR^(Q′)R^(Q″), N₃, ═N—OH, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety; wherein R^(Q′) and R^(Q″) are each independently hydrogen, or an aliphatic, alicyclic, heteroaliphatic, heteroalicyclic, aryl or heteroaryl moiety, or R^(Q′) and R^(Q″), taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, may form an alicyclic, heteroalicyclic, alicyclicc(aryl), heteroalicyclic(aryl), alicyclic(heteroaryl) or heteroalicyclic(heteroaryl) moiety, or an aryl or heteroaryl moiety; and optionally a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent; such that the passageway is expanded.
 97. The method of claim 96, wherein the lumen of a body passageway is expanded in order to eliminate a biliary, gastrointestinal, esophageal, tracheal/bronchial, urethral and/or vascular obstruction.
 98. The method of claim 97, wherein the lumen of a body passageway is expanded in order to eliminate a vascular obstruction. 